PROJECT MANUAL – ISSUED FOR BID

PROJECT MANUAL – ISSUED FOR BID

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation

University of Maine

Orono, Maine

Architect Project No: 4212.80

WBRC ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS 44 Central Street Bangor, Maine 04401 Phone: (207) 947-4511 Web Site: www.wbrcae.com

Issued: August 7, 2021

Copyright © 2021 WBRC Architects Engineers. All rights reserved.

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 01 07 - 1 Seals Page

DOCUMENT 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

MECHANICAL ENGINEER

Andrew J. Rudnicki, PE

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER

Andrew C. Straub, PE

END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 07

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 01 10 – 1 Table of Contents

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP # of Pages DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Introductory Information 00 01 01 Project Title Page 1 00 01 07 Seals Page 1 00 01 10 Table of Contents 2 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 1 Procurement Requirements 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids 1 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 2 00 41 13 Bid Form 1 00 43 13 Bid Security Form 1 Contracting Requirements 00 51 00 Notice of Award 1 00 52 13 Construction Contract Agreement Form 2 00 61 13.13 Performance Bond Form 1 00 61 13.16 Payment Bond Form 1 00 62 16 G715 Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 1 00 62 16.10 Certificate of Liability Insurance (ACORD) 2 00 62 16.11 Commercial General Liability Coverage Form (ISO CG 00 01 12 04) 15 00 62 16.12 Additional Insured – Owners, Lessees or Contractors – Scheduled Person or Organization (ISO CG 20 10 07 04) 1 00 62 16.13 Additional Insured – Owners, Lessees or Contractors – Completed Operations (ISO CG 20 37 07 04) 1 00 62 16.14 Designated Location(s) General Aggregate Limit (ISO CG 25 04 03 97) 2 00 62 73 G703 Schedule of Values Form (Continuation Sheet) 1 00 62 76 G702 Application for Payment Form 1 00 62 76.13 Sales Tax Form 1 00 62 76.16 G707A Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage Form 1 00 62 79 Stored Materials Form 2 00 63 14 G716 Request for Information Form 1 00 63 33 G710 Architect’s Supplemental Instructions Form 1 00 63 46 G714 Construction Change Directive Form 1 00 63 57 G709 Proposal Request Form 1 00 63 63 G701 Change Order Form 1 00 65 16 G704 Certificate of Substantial Completion Form 1 00 65 19 Certificate of Completion Form 1 00 65 19.13 G706 Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims Form 1 00 65 19.16 G706A Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens Form 1 00 65 19.17 Waiver of Lien 1 00 65 19.18 Subcontractor/Supplier Conditional Release and Waiver of Lien 1 00 65 19.19 G707 Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form 1 00 72 00 A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 43 00 73 00.11 Schedule of Liquidated Damages 1 00 73 16 Insurance Requirements – A101 Exhibit A Insurance and Bonds 8 00 73 46 Wage Determination Schedule 1 SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 4 01 14 00 Work Restrictions 1 01 21 00 Allowances 3 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 4 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 2

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 01 10 – 2 Table of Contents

01 29 00 Payment Procedures 4 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 6 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 8 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 7 01 42 00 References 7 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 8 01 60 00 Product Requirements 5 01 73 00 Execution 7 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 5 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 7 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 3 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 5 FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 Selective Demolition 5 FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 23- HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 8 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 3 23 05 19 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 4 23 05 23 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 6 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 4 23 05 48.13 Vibration Controls for HVAC 6 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 4 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 18 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 17 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 7 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping 9 23 22 13 Steam and Condensate Heating Piping 9 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 7 23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment 4 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 9 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 7 23 64 23.21 Air Cooled, Scroll Water Chillers 12 23 73 13 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units 9 DIVISION 26- ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 5 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 4 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 3 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 5 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 6 26 28 13 Fuses 3 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 4 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 5 26 29 23 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 9

END OF SECTION 00 01 10

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 01 15 - 1 List of Drawing Sheets

DOCUMENT 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

1.01 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovations, dated April 30, 2021, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications. GENERAL GI001 COVER SHEET GI002 PROJECT SITE STAGING PLAN MECHANICAL M-001 MECHANICAL LEGEND MD100 BASEMENT MECHANICAL REMOVALS PLAN MD101 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL REMOVALS PLAN MD104 ROOF MECHANICAL REMOVALS PLAN M-100 BASEMENT MECHANICAL PLAN M-101 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M-501 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-601 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL E-001 ELECTRICAL LEGEND ED100 BASEMENT ELECTRICAL REMOVALS PLAN ED101 FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL REMOVALS PLAN ED104 ROOF ELECTRICAL REMOVALS PLAN EP100 BASEMENT ELECTRICAL PLAN EP101 FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN E-501 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 15

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 11 13 – 1 Advertisement for Bids

SECTION 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Bids for: UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION Shall be submitted electronically to [email protected] With the following Email Subject Line: UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION Bids will be received until 2:00pm on Wednesday, September 1, 2021 at which time Bids will be opened and read aloud via Zoom. Bid opening attendance is available via PC, Mac, Linux, iOS or Android: https://maine.zoom.us/j/89240546442?pwd=QWlYMy9YZC9VWGNoZDFyZWU5TTgvdz09 Password: 660528 Or via telephone US: +1 312 626 6799 Meeting ID: 892 4054 6442 Password: 660528 Bids received after the stated time will not be considered and will be returned unopened. Electronic bid submission must be accompanied by a copy of a satisfactory Bid Bond for 5% of the Bid (checks will not be accepted) which shall be in conformity with the form of Bond contained in Section 00 43 13 of the Specifications. Upon determination of the apparent low bidder, the University will contact the low bidder and request an original hard copy of the bid bond be delivered within 72 hours. The University reserves the right to waive all formalities and reject any or all bids or to accept any bids. Scholarships, donations, or gifts to the University will not be considered in the evaluation of responses. Electronic Bid Submission Requirements: A SIGNED virus-free electronic bid form must be submitted as follows:

• The bid and bid bond must be submitted electronically as a single PDF file to the email address shown above.

• Electronic submission must be received by the required Date/Time reflected above. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a 100% Performance Bond and a 100% Payment Bond to cover the execution of the Contract which shall be in conformity with the form of Bonds contained in Sections 00 61 13.13 and 00 61 13.16, respectively, of the Specifications and shall be for the Contract amount. Bidders may attend a non-mandatory pre-bid meeting on Wednesday August 18, 2021, at 10:00am. Attendees are to meet at the south entrance to DP Corbett, University of Maine. Parking for attendees will be in the Collins Center for the Arts parking lot. Copies of plans and specifications will not be available at the pre-bid meeting. Acquiring or reviewing plans and specifications prior to the meeting is advised. Project Summary: The project consists of the removal of the existing air-cooled chillers and air handling units and replacement with equal capacity higher-efficiency equipment. It is anticipated that the low bidder will contract with the University of Maine System shortly after the bid and will work on equipment submittals in the fall of 2021 to allow for ordering and fabrication of equipment during the fall and winter of 2021. The anticipated mobilization and start of construction on site will be April 11, 2022; with substantial completion June 3, 2022; and demobilization by June 17, 2022. The electronic documents (.pdf) may be examined and downloaded at the following site: http://umaine.edu/ofm/contractors/advertisements/ Any questions related to the plans and specifications must be submitted prior to 4:00pm on Tuesday August 24, 2021, via email to Joshua Young, Facilities Maintenance Manager, University of Maine; [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

https://maine.zoom.us/j/89240546442?pwd=QWlYMy9YZC9VWGNoZDFyZWU5TTgvdz09


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 11 13 – 2 Advertisement for Bids

In complying with the letter and spirit of applicable laws and pursuing its own goal of diversity, the University of Maine System shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, including transgender status or gender expression, national origin, citizenship status, age, disability, genetic information, or veterans status in employment, education, and all other areas of the University System. The University provides reasonable accommodations to qualified individuals with disabilities upon request. General contractors, subcontractors, and product suppliers bidding on this project must subscribe and adhere to same. UNIVERSITY OF MAINE SYSTM by and through UNIVERSITY OF MAINE Joanne Yestramski, Interim Vice President and Chief Business Officer, for University of Maine System Board of Trustees


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 21 13 – 1 Instructions to Bidders

SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1. At the time of the opening of bids, each bidder will be presumed to have inspected the site and to have read and to be thoroughly familiar with the plans and contract documents, including all addenda. The failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument, or document shall not relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect to the bid. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids as may best serve the interests of the University of Maine System.

2. Subject to the University System’s right, reserved herein, to accept or reject any or all bids, the General

Contractor will be selected on the basis of the sum of the lowest base bid, plus such of the alternates as the University System desires to use.

3. The University System is exempt from the payment of Federal Excise Taxes on articles not for resale and

the Federal Transportation Tax on all shipments. The Contractor shall quote less these taxes. Upon application, exemption certificates will be furnished when required.

4. No proposal may be withdrawn during a period of thirty (30) calendar days immediately following the

opening thereof. 5. No contract may be assigned, sublet or transferred without the written consent of the University of Maine

System. 6. All individuals not residents of this State must comply with the provisions of 14 MRSA §704-A. 7. The successful bidder, or bidders, will be required to furnish 100% Contract Bonds to cover the execution

of the contract, in accordance with the AIA Document A101 - 2017 Exhibit A and Article 11 of the AIA Document A201 – 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

8. Contractors may be required to furnish a statement of their business experience, record of accomplishments,

and financial responsibility, at the discretion of the University System. 9. The base bid shall be based on the materials, methods, equipment and products, as specified. 10. Bidders shall submit the bid on the Bid Form provided in the Specifications, Section 00 41 13. 11. Any materials, methods, equipment and products not herein specified, but worthy of consideration by any

General or Subcontractor, may be introduced by a separate letter attached to the regular bid. The Bidder shall state the cost comparison with the specified materials, methods, equipment and products, and the reason for the suggested substitution. It shall be understood by all bidders that the attached letter proposing substitutions shall not be used to determine the low bidder and that all bids are based on specified products.

12. Telegraphic or facsimile proposals will not be considered, but modification of proposals already submitted

will be considered if received prior to the hour set for receipt of proposals. If the telegram or facsimile discloses the amount of the proposal, the proposal will be declared invalid. The bidder bears full responsibility to assure that the correction is delivered to the proper location and within the time required.

13. Where a bidder wishes a product to be considered an “approved equal” for bidding purposes, the product,

along with all supporting documentation, shall be submitted to the architect for review a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to the bid opening date or the file bid due date, if file bids are required on the project. Products which are determined to be an “approved equal” for bidding purposes shall be listed in an addendum issued so as to be received by bidders no less than 72 hours prior to the bid date or the file bid due date if file bids are required.

14. Where the Bid Form requires the tabulation of subcontractors other than “File Bidders,” the Bidder shall

list the name of the firm the bidder intends to use in the event the bidder receives the contract award. 15. Bidders may appeal the award decision by submitting a written protest to the University of Maine System

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 21 13 – 2 Instructions to Bidders

Chief Facilities and General Services Officer within five (5) business days of the date of the award notice (Notice of Award) with a copy of the protest to the successful bidder. The protest must contain a statement of the basis for the challenge.


SECTION 00 41 13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 41 13 – 1 Bid Form

BID FORM – SHORT FORM

BIDDER:

Physical/Street Address

City, State ZIP University of Maine System Carolyn McDonough Director of Capital Planning & Project Management

5765 Service Building, Room 117 Orono, ME 04469-5765

Having carefully examined the form of contract, general conditions and plans and specifications contained therein for

the UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, we the

undersigned propose to furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for

and reasonably incidental to the construction and completion of this contract for the sum of

Dollars ($ ). Alternate prices as follows: Alternate 1 $ Alternate 2 $ Alternate 3 $ This proposal includes the cost of 100% Performance Bond plus 100% Payment Bond. The receipt of the following addenda to plans and specifications is hereby acknowledged: ADDENDUM # DATED ADDENDUM # DATED

ADDENDUM # DATED ADDENDUM # DATED Any material or materials not specified in the bidding document but worthy of consideration may be introduced by the bidder by a separate letter attached to this Bid. A cost comparison must be included giving the comparison with the Material specified and the reason for the suggested substitution. The basic bid shall be as specified. The undersigned agrees, if this Bid is accepted to sign a contract and deliver it, along with the bonds and affidavits for all insurance specified within twelve (12) calendar days after the date of notification of such acceptance, except if the 12th day falls on a Saturday, Sunday or holiday, then the conditions will be fulfilled if the required documents are received before 12 o’clock noon on the day following the holiday, or the Monday following the Saturday or Sunday, and as a guarantee thereof, herewith submits a bid bond as required. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to complete the work on or before June 3, 2022. The undersigned also agrees, if awarded the Contract, that no more than 80% of the contract amount will be sublet to other contractors.

SECTION 00 41 13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 41 13 – 2 Bid Form

Signed (by individual authorized to sign contract) By (printed name & title) Phone PO Box (if applicable) Email NOTE: If bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation, and if a partnership, give full names of all partners.


SECTION 00 43 13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 43 13 – 1 Bid Security Form

BID SECURITY FORM KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WE, the undersigned, as PRINCIPAL

, and

as SURETY, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the Treasurer

of the UNIVERSITY OF MAINE SYSTEM in the penal sum of

for the payment of which, well and truly to

be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and

assigns, signed this day of , 20 .

The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to UNIVERSITY OF MAINE SYSTEM, BY AND THROUGH THE UNIVERSITY OF MAINE, a certain proposal, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof, to enter into a contract in writing for the UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION. NOW THEREFORE, (a) If said proposal shall be rejected, or, in the alternate (b) If said proposal shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form of

contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said proposal) and shall furnish a bond for faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said proposal, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect: It being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.

The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligation of said Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the principal may accept such proposal: and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the Treasurer of the UNIVERSITY OF MAINE SYSTEM, Surety shall pay reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs incurred by the Treasurer of the UNIVERSITY OF MAINE SYSTEM in such suit. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set above. PRINCIPAL: By: L.S. SURETY: SURETY ADDRESS: By: L.S.

**DO NOT ALTER LANGUAGE**


SECTION 00 51 00

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 51 00 – 1 Notice of Award

NOTICE OF AWARD

SAMPLE DATE [Contractor] [Company] [address] [City ST ZIP] RE: NOTICE OF AWARD – UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION UNIVERSITY OF MAINE Dear [Contractor]: You are hereby notified that the University of Maine System, by and through the University of Maine, accepts your Bid of $??.00 for the above named project, subject to final resolution of any bid protests and the parties’ ability to establish and confirm final terms, as well as the execution of a written contract and your furnishing satisfactory bonds within twelve (12) calendar days as provided in the bidding documents. This Notice of Award will permit you to proceed with the ordering of materials and scheduling the work so that the project can be completed on time. Should you fail to execute a contract or furnish satisfactory bonds within the stipulated time, the bid bond accompanying your proposal will be forfeited to the University of Maine System as liquidated damages. Enclosed is your contract agreement for signature. Further, please have your surety provide one original each of the Performance Bond and the Payment Bond, as prescribed in Sections 00 61 13.13 and 00 61 13.16 of the bid document, and a properly executed “Power of Attorney.” Please advise your surety agent that the bonds should carry the same date as this Notice of Award and the Contract Agreement. All originals of the signed contract, bonds and insurance certificates should be forwarded directly to Jennifer Sinclair, Capital Contracts Administrator, Capital Planning and Project Management, 5765 Service Building, Orono, ME 04469. Once they are completely signed, a copy of the contract will be returned for your use. Prior to the start of any work on the construction site, Capital Planning and Project Management must receive Certificates of Liability Insurance as specified in Article A.3 of the AIA Document A101 – 2017 Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds. Please advise your surety that the certificate holder should be as follows: University of Maine System; Office of Risk Management; Robinson Hall, 46 University Drive, Augusta, ME 04330. The day-to-day administrative and technical details of this project will be handled by the University. All correspondence relative to the day-to-day administration of the project should be directed to Joshua Young, Facilities Maintenance Manager, University of Maine; [email protected] . A pre-construction conference on this project will be scheduled as soon as possible. This conference must be attended by your firm’s authorized representative as well as your project superintendent. Sincerely, Joanne Yestramski Interim Vice President & Chief Business Officer Enclosures



00 52 13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 52 13 - 1 Construction Contract Agreement

UNIVERSITY OF MAINE SYSTEM

Construction Contract Agreement

THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into the _ day of __________, 20 , by and between the Contractor, _________________________________, and the University of Maine System acting by and through the University of Maine, 5765 Service Building, Orono, ME 04469, hereinafter called the Owner.

WITNESSETH: That the Owner and the Contractor for the considerations hereinafter named agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1. SCOPE OF THE WORK

The Contractor shall furnish all of the materials and perform all of the work described in the Contract Documents

entitled DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION, prepared by the University of Maine, acting as and in these Contract Documents entitled the Architect and/or Engineer.

ARTICLE 2: START AND TIME OF COMPLETION

The date of the commencement of work shall be the date of this Agreement and shall be substantially completed on

or before June 3, 2022 subject to adjustments as provided in the Contract Documents.

The Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner the following stipulated liquidated damages for each calendar day of delay after the date established for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete: ______________Dollars ($_____) per calendar day.

ARTICLE 3: THE CONTRACT SUM

The Owner shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the Contract as follows _____________ Dollars,

$ ( ), subject to adjustments as provided in the Contract Documents.

The Contract Sum is based upon the following Alternates and Unit Prices, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner:

Alternate (1) Alternate (2) Alternate (3) Unit Prices

Item Price Item Price

Final payment shall be made after completion and acceptance of the work as provided in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4: THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents for this project, except for modifications issued after execution of this agreement, consist of:

.1 This agreement. .2 AIA Document A201-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as modified by the

Owner.

00 52 13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 52 13 - 2 Construction Contract Agreement

.3 AIA A101 – 2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, as modified by the Owner. .4 The Specifications as outlined in the Project Manual: UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation, dated

August 7, 2021. .5 The Drawings as listed in the Project Manual.

ARTICLE 5: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVES

The Owner’s Representative on this project will be Joanne Yestramski, who is authorized to sign contracts and other legal documents related to this project on behalf of the Owner.

The Owner’s Project Manager on this project will be Joshua Young.

The Owner and the Contractor hereby agree to the full performance of the covenants herein.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement in triplicate on the day and year first above written. UNIVERSITY OF MAINE SYSTEM

by and through University of Maine

Company Company

By: By: Joanne Yestramski Interim Vice President & Chief Business

Officer

University of Maine


SECTION 00 61 13.13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 61 13.13 – 1 Performance Bond Form

PERFORMANCE BOND FORM SAMPLE

_______________________________ Bond No. KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS THAT (1) (2) of and State of , as PRINCIPAL, and (3) , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of and having a usual place of business in , as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the University of Maine System in the sum of Dollars ($ ), to be paid said Treasurer of the University of Maine System, or successor in office, for which payment well and truly to be made, Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Principal shall promptly and faithfully perform the Contract entered into on the (4) day of , A.D., 20 for the construction of (5) then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the University of Maine System. Signed and sealed this (4) day of , 20 . WITNESSES: SIGNATURES: LS

LS

LS Bonding Company Agent: Company:

Street:

City, State, Zip:

Telephone: (1) Correct name of Contractor. (2) A corporation, a partnership, or an individual, as the case may be. (3) Correct name of Surety. (4) Same date as that of contract. (5) Name of Project as designated in contract. If Contractor is a partnership, all partners should execute bond. A Power of Attorney document, together with a statement that it still is in effect shall be provided by the person executing this bond. Bond must be countersigned by a Resident Maine Agent.

**DO NOT ALTER LANGUAGE**

END OF SECTION 00 61 13.13

SECTION 00 61 13.16 PAYMENT BOND FORM

SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 61 13.16 – 1 Payment Bond Form

_______________________________ Bond No. KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS THAT (1) (2) of and State of , as PRINCIPAL, and (3) , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of and having a usual place of business in , as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the University of Maine System in the sum of Dollars ($ ), for the use and benefit of claimants* as herein below defined, for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Principal shall promptly satisfy all claims and demands incurred for all labor and materials used or required by the Principal in connection with the work contemplated in the Contract entered into on the (4) day of , A.D., 20 for the construction of (5) , and shall fully reimburse the obligee for all outlay and expense which said obligee may incur in making good any default of said principal, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect. *A Claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal or with a subcontractor of the Principal for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the contract. Signed and sealed this (6) day of , 20 . WITNESSES: SIGNATURES: LS

LS

LS Bonding Company Agent: Company:

Street:

City, State, Zip:

Telephone: (1) Correct name of Contractor. (2) A corporation, a partnership, or an individual, as the case may be. (3) Correct name of Surety. (4) Same date as that of contract. (5) Name of Project as designated in contract. (6) Same date as that of Contract. If contractor is a partnership, all partners should execute bond. A Power of Attorney document, together with a statement that it still is in effect shall be provided by the person executing this bond. Bond must be countersigned by a Resident Maine Agent.

**DO NOT ALTER LANGUAGE** END OF SECTION 00 61 13.16

Document G715™

– 2017Supplemental Attachmentfor ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25

AIA Document G715™ – 20 17 . Copyright © 1991 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:13:37 ET on 03/04/2021 under Order No.2908190133 which expires on 06/22/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail [email protected] Notes: (3B9ADA46)

1

PROJECT: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION: CERTIFICATE INFORMATION:Samples Contract For: Producer:

Date: Insured: Date:

OWNER: (name and address) ARCHITECT: (name and address) CONTRACTOR: (name and address)University of Maine Systemby and throughUniversity of Maine5765 Service BuildingOrono, ME 04469

A. General Liability Yes No N/A1. Does this policy include coverage for:

a Damages because of bodily injury, sickness, or disease, including occupational sickness or disease, and death of any person?

b Personal injury and advertising injury?c Damages because of physical damage to or destruction of tangible property,

including the loss of use of such property?d Bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations?e The Contractor’s indemnity obligations included in the Contract Documents?

2. Does this policy contain an exclusion or restriction of coverage for:a Claims by one insured against another insured, where the exclusion or

restrictions is based solely on the fact that the claimant is an insured, and there would otherwise be coverage for the claim?

b Claims for property damage to the Contractor’s Work arising out of the products-completed operations hazard where the damaged Work or the Work out of which the damage arises was performed by a Subcontractor?

c Claims for bodily injury other than to employees of the insured?d Claims for the Contractor’s indemnity obligations included in the Contract

Documents arising out of injury to employees of the insured?e Claims for loss excluded under a prior work endorsement or other similar

exclusionary language? f Claims or loss due to physical damage under a prior injury endorsement or

similar exclusionary language?g Claims related to residential, multi-family, or other habitational projects?h Claims related to roofing?i Claims related to exterior insulation finish systems, synthetic stucco, or

similar exterior coatings or surfaces?j Claims related to earth subsistence or movement?k Claims related to explosion, collapse, and underground hazards?

B. Other Insurance Coverage Yes No N/A

1. Indicate whether the Contractor has the following insurance coverages and, if so,indicate the coverage limits for each.a Professional liability insurance

Coverage limits: b Pollution liability insurance

00 62 16SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 16 - 1 G715 - Supplemental Attachment for ACORD

AIA Document G715™ – 20 17 . Copyright © 1991 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:13:37 ET on 03/04/2021 under Order No.2908190133 which expires on 06/22/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail [email protected] Notes: (3B9ADA46)

2

Coverage limits: c Insurance for maritime liability risks associated with the operation of a vessel

Coverage limits: d Insurance for the use or operation of manned or unmanned aircraft

Coverage limits: e Property insurance

Coverage limits: f Railroad protective liability insurance

Coverage limits: g Asbestos abatement liability insurance

Coverage limits: h Insurance for physical damage to property while it is in storage and in transit

to the construction siteCoverage limits:

i Other:

(Authorized Representative)

(Date of Issue)

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 16 - 2 G715 - Supplemental Attachment for ACORD

CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCETHIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATIONONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATEHOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND ORALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.

INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE

COVERAGES

CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION

ACORD 25-S (7/97) cO ACORD CORPORATION 1988

DATE (MM/DD/YY)

PRODUCER

INSURED

INSRLTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER

POLICY EFFECTIVEDATE (MM/DD/YY)

POLICY EXPIRATIONDATE (MM/DD/YY) LIMITS

GENERAL LIABILITY

AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY

GARAGE LIABILITY

EXCESS LIABILITY

WORKERS COMPENSATION ANDEMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY

OTHER

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS

ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER:

SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION

DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL DAYS WRITTEN

NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL

IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR

REPRESENTATIVES.

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDINGANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED ORMAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCHPOLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.

INSURER A:

INSURER B:

INSURER C:

INSURER D:

INSURER E:

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY

CLAIMS MADE OCCUR

GEN’L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:

POLICYPRO-JECT LOC

ANY AUTO

ALL OWNED AUTOS

SCHEDULED AUTOS

HIRED AUTOS

NON-OWNED AUTOS

ANY AUTO

OCCUR CLAIMS MADE

DEDUCTIBLE

RETENTION $

EACH OCCURRENCE

FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire)

MED EXP (Any one person)

PERSONAL & ADV INJURY

GENERAL AGGREGATE

PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG

COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT(Ea accident)

BODILY INJURY(Per person)

BODILY INJURY(Per accident)

PROPERTY DAMAGE(Per accident)

AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT

OTHER THANAUTO ONLY:

EA ACC

AGG

EACH OCCURRENCE

AGGREGATE

WC STATU-TORY LIMITS

OTH-ER

E.L. EACH ACCIDENT

E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE

E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

ACORDTM

Sample

00 62 16.10

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 16.10 - 1 Certificate of Insurance Form

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sdow

Typewritten Text

University of Maine System is named an additional insured under General Liability. Project:

sdow

Typewritten Text

sdow

Typewritten Text

University of Maine System Office of Risk Management Robinson Hall 46 University Drive Augusta, ME 04330

ACORD 25-S (7/97)

IMPORTANT

If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statementon this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).

If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies mayrequire an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificateholder in lieu of such endorsement(s).

DISCLAIMER

The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract betweenthe issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does itaffirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.

Sample

00 62 16.10

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 16.10 - 2 Certificate of Insurance Form

sherri

Rectangle

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITYCG 00 01 12 04

CG 00 01 12 04 © ISO Properties, Inc., 2003 Page 1 of 15

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM

Various provisions in this policy restrict coverage.Read the entire policy carefully to determine rights,duties and what is and is not covered.Throughout this policy the words "you" and "your" referto the Named Insured shown in the Declarations, andany other person or organization qualifying as aNamed Insured under this policy. The words "we", "us"and "our" refer to the company providing this insur-ance.The word "insured" means any person or organizationqualifying as such under Section II – Who Is An In-sured.Other words and phrases that appear in quotationmarks have special meaning. Refer to Section V –Definitions.SECTION I – COVERAGESCOVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTYDAMAGE LIABILITY1. Insuring Agreement

a. We will pay those sums that the insured be-comes legally obligated to pay as damages be-cause of "bodily injury" or "property damage" towhich this insurance applies. We will have theright and duty to defend the insured against any"suit" seeking those damages. However, we willhave no duty to defend the insured against any"suit" seeking damages for "bodily injury" or"property damage" to which this insurance doesnot apply. We may, at our discretion, investigateany "occurrence" and settle any claim or "suit"that may result. But:

(1) The amount we will pay for damages islimited as described in Section III – Limits OfInsurance; and

(2) Our right and duty to defend ends when wehave used up the applicable limit of insur-ance in the payment of judgments or set-tlements under Coverages A or B or medicalexpenses under Coverage C.

No other obligation or liability to pay sums orperform acts or services is covered unless ex-plicitly provided for under Supplementary Pay-ments – Coverages A and B.

b. This insurance applies to "bodily injury" and"property damage" only if:

(1) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" iscaused by an "occurrence" that takes placein the "coverage territory";

(2) The "bodily injury" or "property damage"occurs during the policy period; and

(3) Prior to the policy period, no insured listedunder Paragraph 1. of Section II – Who IsAn Insured and no "employee" authorized byyou to give or receive notice of an "occur-rence" or claim, knew that the "bodily injury"or "property damage" had occurred, in wholeor in part. If such a listed insured or author-ized "employee" knew, prior to the policy pe-riod, that the "bodily injury" or "propertydamage" occurred, then any continuation,change or resumption of such "bodily injury"or "property damage" during or after the pol-icy period will be deemed to have beenknown prior to the policy period.

c. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" whichoccurs during the policy period and was not,prior to the policy period, known to have oc-curred by any insured listed under Paragraph 1.of Section II – Who Is An Insured or any "em-ployee" authorized by you to give or receive no-tice of an "occurrence" or claim, includes anycontinuation, change or resumption of that"bodily injury" or "property damage" after theend of the policy period.

d. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" will bedeemed to have been known to have occurredat the earliest time when any insured listed un-der Paragraph 1. of Section II – Who Is An In-sured or any "employee" authorized by you togive or receive notice of an "occurrence" orclaim:

(1) Reports all, or any part, of the "bodily injury"or "property damage" to us or any other in-surer;

(2) Receives a written or verbal demand orclaim for damages because of the "bodily in-jury" or "property damage"; or

(3) Becomes aware by any other means that"bodily injury" or "property damage" has oc-curred or has begun to occur.

Sample

00 62 16.11

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 16.11 - 1 Certificate of Insurance Form CG 00 01 12 04

Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

Page 2 of 15 © ISO Properties, Inc., 2003 CG 00 01 12 04

e. Damages because of "bodily injury" includedamages claimed by any person or organizationfor care, loss of services or death resulting atany time from the "bodily injury".

2. ExclusionsThis insurance does not apply to:a. Expected Or Intended Injury

"Bodily injury" or "property damage" expected orintended from the standpoint of the insured.This exclusion does not apply to "bodily injury"resulting from the use of reasonable force toprotect persons or property.

b. Contractual Liability"Bodily injury" or "property damage" for whichthe insured is obligated to pay damages by rea-son of the assumption of liability in a contract oragreement. This exclusion does not apply to li-ability for damages:

(1) That the insured would have in the absenceof the contract or agreement; or

(2) Assumed in a contract or agreement that isan "insured contract", provided the "bodilyinjury" or "property damage" occurs subse-quent to the execution of the contract oragreement. Solely for the purposes of liabil-ity assumed in an "insured contract", rea-sonable attorney fees and necessary litiga-tion expenses incurred by or for a partyother than an insured are deemed to bedamages because of "bodily injury" or"property damage", provided:

(a) Liability to such party for, or for the costof, that party's defense has also beenassumed in the same "insured contract";and

(b) Such attorney fees and litigation ex-penses are for defense of that partyagainst a civil or alternative dispute reso-lution proceeding in which damages towhich this insurance applies are alleged.

c. Liquor Liability"Bodily injury" or "property damage" for whichany insured may be held liable by reason of:

(1) Causing or contributing to the intoxication ofany person;

(2) The furnishing of alcoholic beverages to aperson under the legal drinking age or underthe influence of alcohol; or

(3) Any statute, ordinance or regulation relatingto the sale, gift, distribution or use of alco-holic beverages.

This exclusion applies only if you are in thebusiness of manufacturing, distributing, selling,serving or furnishing alcoholic beverages.

d. Workers' Compensation And Similar LawsAny obligation of the insured under a workers'compensation, disability benefits or unemploy-ment compensation law or any similar law.

e. Employer's Liability"Bodily injury" to:

(1) An "employee" of the insured arising out ofand in the course of:

(a) Employment by the insured; or(b) Performing duties related to the conduct

of the insured's business; or(2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister

of that "employee" as a consequence ofParagraph (1) above.

This exclusion applies:(1) Whether the insured may be liable as an

employer or in any other capacity; and(2) To any obligation to share damages with or

repay someone else who must pay dam-ages because of the injury.

This exclusion does not apply to liability as-sumed by the insured under an "insured con-tract".

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


f. Pollution(1) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising

out of the actual, alleged or threatened dis-charge, dispersal, seepage, migration, re-lease or escape of "pollutants":

(a) At or from any premises, site or locationwhich is or was at any time owned or oc-cupied by, or rented or loaned to, any in-sured. However, this subparagraph doesnot apply to:(i) "Bodily injury" if sustained within a

building and caused by smoke,fumes, vapor or soot produced by ororiginating from equipment that isused to heat, cool or dehumidify thebuilding, or equipment that is used toheat water for personal use, by thebuilding's occupants or their guests;

(ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage"for which you may be held liable, ifyou are a contractor and the owner orlessee of such premises, site or loca-tion has been added to your policy asan additional insured with respect toyour ongoing operations performedfor that additional insured at thatpremises, site or location and suchpremises, site or location is not andnever was owned or occupied by, orrented or loaned to, any insured,other than that additional insured; or

(iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage"arising out of heat, smoke or fumesfrom a "hostile fire";

(b) At or from any premises, site or locationwhich is or was at any time used by orfor any insured or others for the handling,storage, disposal, processing ortreatment of waste;

(c) Which are or were at any time trans-ported, handled, stored, treated, dis-posed of, or processed as waste by orfor:(i) Any insured; or(ii) Any person or organization for whom

you may be legally responsible; or

(d) At or from any premises, site or locationon which any insured or any contractorsor subcontractors working directly or indi-rectly on any insured's behalf are per-forming operations if the "pollutants" arebrought on or to the premises, site or lo-cation in connection with such operationsby such insured, contractor or subcon-tractor. However, this subparagraphdoes not apply to:(i) "Bodily injury" or "property damage"

arising out of the escape of fuels, lu-bricants or other operating fluidswhich are needed to perform thenormal electrical, hydraulic or me-chanical functions necessary for theoperation of "mobile equipment" or itsparts, if such fuels, lubricants or otheroperating fluids escape from a vehiclepart designed to hold, store or receivethem. This exception does not apply ifthe "bodily injury" or "propertydamage" arises out of the intentionaldischarge, dispersal or release of thefuels, lubricants or other operatingfluids, or if such fuels, lubricants orother operating fluids are brought onor to the premises, site or locationwith the intent that they be dis-charged, dispersed or released aspart of the operations being per-formed by such insured, contractor orsubcontractor;

(ii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage"sustained within a building andcaused by the release of gases,fumes or vapors from materialsbrought into that building in connec-tion with operations being performedby you or on your behalf by a con-tractor or subcontractor; or

(iii) "Bodily injury" or "property damage"arising out of heat, smoke or fumesfrom a "hostile fire".

(e) At or from any premises, site or locationon which any insured or any contractorsor subcontractors working directly or indi-rectly on any insured's behalf are per-forming operations if the operations areto test for, monitor, clean up, remove,contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or inany way respond to, or assess the ef-fects of, "pollutants".

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


(2) Any loss, cost or expense arising out of any:(a) Request, demand, order or statutory or

regulatory requirement that any insuredor others test for, monitor, clean up, re-move, contain, treat, detoxify or neutral-ize, or in any way respond to, or assessthe effects of, "pollutants"; or

(b) Claim or "suit" by or on behalf of a gov-ernmental authority for damages be-cause of testing for, monitoring, cleaningup, removing, containing, treating, de-toxifying or neutralizing, or in any wayresponding to, or assessing the effectsof, "pollutants".

However, this paragraph does not apply toliability for damages because of "propertydamage" that the insured would have in theabsence of such request, demand, order orstatutory or regulatory requirement, or suchclaim or "suit" by or on behalf of a govern-mental authority.

g. Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft"Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising outof the ownership, maintenance, use or entrust-ment to others of any aircraft, "auto" or water-craft owned or operated by or rented or loanedto any insured. Use includes operation and"loading or unloading".This exclusion applies even if the claims againstany insured allege negligence or otherwrongdoing in the supervision, hiring, employ-ment, training or monitoring of others by thatinsured, if the "occurrence" which caused the"bodily injury" or "property damage" involved theownership, maintenance, use or entrustment toothers of any aircraft, "auto" or watercraft that isowned or operated by or rented or loaned toany insured.This exclusion does not apply to:

(1) A watercraft while ashore on premises youown or rent;

(2) A watercraft you do not own that is:(a) Less than 26 feet long; and(b) Not being used to carry persons or prop-

erty for a charge;(3) Parking an "auto" on, or on the ways next to,

premises you own or rent, provided the"auto" is not owned by or rented or loaned toyou or the insured;

(4) Liability assumed under any "insured con-tract" for the ownership, maintenance or useof aircraft or watercraft; or

(5) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arisingout of:

(a) The operation of machinery or equipmentthat is attached to, or part of, a landvehicle that would qualify under thedefinition of "mobile equipment" if it werenot subject to a compulsory or financialresponsibility law or other motor vehicleinsurance law in the state where it is li-censed or principally garaged; or

(b) the operation of any of the machinery orequipment listed in Paragraph f.(2) orf.(3) of the definition of "mobile equip-ment".

h. Mobile Equipment"Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising outof:

(1) The transportation of "mobile equipment" byan "auto" owned or operated by or rented orloaned to any insured; or

(2) The use of "mobile equipment" in, or while inpractice for, or while being prepared for, anyprearranged racing, speed, demolition, orstunting activity.

i. War"Bodily injury" or "property damage", howevercaused, arising, directly or indirectly, out of:

(1) War, including undeclared or civil war;(2) Warlike action by a military force, including

action in hindering or defending against anactual or expected attack, by any govern-ment, sovereign or other authority usingmilitary personnel or other agents; or

(3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurpedpower, or action taken by governmental au-thority in hindering or defending against anyof these.

j. Damage To Property"Property damage" to:

(1) Property you own, rent, or occupy, includingany costs or expenses incurred by you, orany other person, organization or entity, forrepair, replacement, enhancement, restora-tion or maintenance of such property for anyreason, including prevention of injury to aperson or damage to another's property;

(2) Premises you sell, give away or abandon, ifthe "property damage" arises out of any partof those premises;

(3) Property loaned to you;(4) Personal property in the care, custody or

control of the insured;

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


(5) That particular part of real property on whichyou or any contractors or subcontractorsworking directly or indirectly on your behalfare performing operations, if the "propertydamage" arises out of those operations; or

(6) That particular part of any property that mustbe restored, repaired or replaced because"your work" was incorrectly performed on it.

Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion donot apply to "property damage" (other thandamage by fire) to premises, including the con-tents of such premises, rented to you for a pe-riod of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separatelimit of insurance applies to Damage To Prem-ises Rented To You as described in Section III– Limits Of Insurance.Paragraph (2) of this exclusion does not apply ifthe premises are "your work" and were neveroccupied, rented or held for rental by you.Paragraphs (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this exclusiondo not apply to liability assumed under a side-track agreement.Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not applyto "property damage" included in the "products-completed operations hazard".

k. Damage To Your Product"Property damage" to "your product" arising outof it or any part of it.

l. Damage To Your Work"Property damage" to "your work" arising out ofit or any part of it and included in the "products-completed operations hazard".This exclusion does not apply if the damagedwork or the work out of which the damagearises was performed on your behalf by a sub-contractor.

m. Damage To Impaired Property Or PropertyNot Physically Injured"Property damage" to "impaired property" orproperty that has not been physically injured,arising out of:

(1) A defect, deficiency, inadequacy or danger-ous condition in "your product" or "yourwork"; or

(2) A delay or failure by you or anyone acting onyour behalf to perform a contract oragreement in accordance with its terms.

This exclusion does not apply to the loss of useof other property arising out of sudden and ac-cidental physical injury to "your product" or"your work" after it has been put to its intendeduse.

n. Recall Of Products, Work Or ImpairedPropertyDamages claimed for any loss, cost or expenseincurred by you or others for the loss of use,withdrawal, recall, inspection, repair, replace-ment, adjustment, removal or disposal of:

(1) "Your product";(2) "Your work"; or(3) "Impaired property";if such product, work, or property is withdrawnor recalled from the market or from use by anyperson or organization because of a known orsuspected defect, deficiency, inadequacy ordangerous condition in it.

o. Personal And Advertising Injury"Bodily injury" arising out of "personal and ad-vertising injury".

p. Electronic DataDamages arising out of the loss of, loss of useof, damage to, corruption of, inability to access,or inability to manipulate electronic data.As used in this exclusion, electronic data meansinformation, facts or programs stored as or on,created or used on, or transmitted to or from com-puter software, including systems andapplications software, hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processingdevices or any other media which are used withelectronically controlled equipment.

Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage byfire to premises while rented to you or temporarilyoccupied by you with permission of the owner. Aseparate limit of insurance applies to this coverageas described in Section III – Limits Of Insurance.

COVERAGE B PERSONAL AND ADVERTISINGINJURY LIABILITY1. Insuring Agreement

a. We will pay those sums that the insured be-comes legally obligated to pay as damages be-cause of "personal and advertising injury" towhich this insurance applies. We will have theright and duty to defend the insured against any"suit" seeking those damages. However, we willhave no duty to defend the insured against any"suit" seeking damages for "personal and ad-vertising injury" to which this insurance does notapply. We may, at our discretion, investigateany offense and settle any claim or "suit" thatmay result. But:

(1) The amount we will pay for damages islimited as described in Section III – Limits OfInsurance; and

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


(2) Our right and duty to defend end when wehave used up the applicable limit of insur-ance in the payment of judgments or set-tlements under Coverages A or B or medicalexpenses under Coverage C.

No other obligation or liability to pay sums orperform acts or services is covered unless ex-plicitly provided for under Supplementary Pay-ments – Coverages A and B.

b. This insurance applies to "personal and adver-tising injury" caused by an offense arising out ofyour business but only if the offense was com-mitted in the "coverage territory" during the pol-icy period.

2. ExclusionsThis insurance does not apply to:a. Knowing Violation Of Rights Of Another

"Personal and advertising injury" caused by orat the direction of the insured with the knowl-edge that the act would violate the rights of an-other and would inflict "personal and advertisinginjury".

b. Material Published With Knowledge OfFalsity"Personal and advertising injury" arising out oforal or written publication of material, if done byor at the direction of the insured with knowledgeof its falsity.

c. Material Published Prior To Policy Period"Personal and advertising injury" arising out oforal or written publication of material whose firstpublication took place before the beginning ofthe policy period.

d. Criminal Acts"Personal and advertising injury" arising out of acriminal act committed by or at the direction ofthe insured.

e. Contractual Liability"Personal and advertising injury" for which theinsured has assumed liability in a contract oragreement. This exclusion does not apply to li-ability for damages that the insured would havein the absence of the contract or agreement.

f. Breach Of Contract"Personal and advertising injury" arising out of abreach of contract, except an implied contract touse another's advertising idea in your "adver-tisement".

g. Quality Or Performance Of Goods – FailureTo Conform To Statements"Personal and advertising injury" arising out ofthe failure of goods, products or services toconform with any statement of quality or per-formance made in your "advertisement".

h. Wrong Description Of Prices"Personal and advertising injury" arising out ofthe wrong description of the price of goods,products or services stated in your "advertise-ment".

i. Infringement Of Copyright, Patent,Trademark Or Trade Secret"Personal and advertising injury" arising out ofthe infringement of copyright, patent, trademark,trade secret or other intellectual property rights.However, this exclusion does not apply to in-fringement, in your "advertisement", of copy-right, trade dress or slogan.

j. Insureds In Media And Internet TypeBusinesses"Personal and advertising injury" committed byan insured whose business is:

(1) Advertising, broadcasting, publishing ortelecasting;

(2) Designing or determining content of web-sites for others; or

(3) An Internet search, access, content or ser-vice provider.

However, this exclusion does not apply toParagraphs 14.a., b. and c. of "personal andadvertising injury" under the Definitions Section.For the purposes of this exclusion, the placingof frames, borders or links, or advertising, foryou or others anywhere on the Internet, is notby itself, considered the business of advertising,broadcasting, publishing or telecasting.

k. Electronic Chatrooms Or Bulletin Boards"Personal and advertising injury" arising out ofan electronic chatroom or bulletin board the in-sured hosts, owns, or over which the insuredexercises control.

l. Unauthorized Use Of Another's Name OrProduct"Personal and advertising injury" arising out ofthe unauthorized use of another's name orproduct in your e-mail address, domain name ormetatag, or any other similar tactics to misleadanother's potential customers.

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


m. Pollution"Personal and advertising injury" arising out ofthe actual, alleged or threatened discharge,dispersal, seepage, migration, release or es-cape of "pollutants" at any time.

n. Pollution-RelatedAny loss, cost or expense arising out of any:

(1) Request, demand, order or statutory orregulatory requirement that any insured orothers test for, monitor, clean up, remove,contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or inany way respond to, or assess the effects of,"pollutants"; or

(2) Claim or suit by or on behalf of a govern-mental authority for damages because oftesting for, monitoring, cleaning up, remov-ing, containing, treating, detoxifying or neu-tralizing, or in any way responding to, or as-sessing the effects of, "pollutants".

o. War"Personal and advertising injury", howevercaused, arising, directly or indirectly, out of:

(1) War, including undeclared or civil war;(2) Warlike action by a military force, including

action in hindering or defending against anactual or expected attack, by any govern-ment, sovereign or other authority usingmilitary personnel or other agents; or

(3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurpedpower, or action taken by governmental au-thority in hindering or defending against anyof these.

COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS1. Insuring Agreement

a. We will pay medical expenses as describedbelow for "bodily injury" caused by an accident:

(1) On premises you own or rent;(2) On ways next to premises you own or rent;

or(3) Because of your operations;provided that:

(1) The accident takes place in the "coverageterritory" and during the policy period;

(2) The expenses are incurred and reported tous within one year of the date of the acci-dent; and

(3) The injured person submits to examination,at our expense, by physicians of our choiceas often as we reasonably require.

b. We will make these payments regardless offault. These payments will not exceed the ap-plicable limit of insurance. We will pay reason-able expenses for:

(1) First aid administered at the time of anaccident;

(2) Necessary medical, surgical, x-ray anddental services, including prosthetic devices;and

(3) Necessary ambulance, hospital, profes-sional nursing and funeral services.

2. ExclusionsWe will not pay expenses for "bodily injury":a. Any Insured

To any insured, except "volunteer workers".b. Hired Person

To a person hired to do work for or on behalf ofany insured or a tenant of any insured.

c. Injury On Normally Occupied PremisesTo a person injured on that part of premises youown or rent that the person normally occupies.

d. Workers Compensation And Similar LawsTo a person, whether or not an "employee" ofany insured, if benefits for the "bodily injury" arepayable or must be provided under a workers'compensation or disability benefits law or asimilar law.

e. Athletics ActivitiesTo a person injured while practicing, instructingor participating in any physical exercises orgames, sports, or athletic contests.

f. Products-Completed Operations HazardIncluded within the "products-completed opera-tions hazard".

g. Coverage A ExclusionsExcluded under Coverage A.

SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS – COVERAGES AAND B1. We will pay, with respect to any claim we investi-

gate or settle, or any "suit" against an insured wedefend:a. All expenses we incur.b. Up to $250 for cost of bail bonds required be-

cause of accidents or traffic law violations aris-ing out of the use of any vehicle to which theBodily Injury Liability Coverage applies. We donot have to furnish these bonds.

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


c. The cost of bonds to release attachments, butonly for bond amounts within the applicable limitof insurance. We do not have to furnish thesebonds.

d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the in-sured at our request to assist us in the investi-gation or defense of the claim or "suit", includ-ing actual loss of earnings up to $250 a daybecause of time off from work.

e. All costs taxed against the insured in the "suit".f. Prejudgment interest awarded against the in-

sured on that part of the judgment we pay. If wemake an offer to pay the applicable limit of in-surance, we will not pay any prejudgment inter-est based on that period of time after the offer.

g. All interest on the full amount of any judgmentthat accrues after entry of the judgment and be-fore we have paid, offered to pay, or depositedin court the part of the judgment that is withinthe applicable limit of insurance.

These payments will not reduce the limits of insur-ance.

2. If we defend an insured against a "suit" and anindemnitee of the insured is also named as a partyto the "suit", we will defend that indemnitee if all ofthe following conditions are met:a. The "suit" against the indemnitee seeks dam-

ages for which the insured has assumed the li-ability of the indemnitee in a contract or agree-ment that is an "insured contract";

b. This insurance applies to such liability assumedby the insured;

c. The obligation to defend, or the cost of thedefense of, that indemnitee, has also been as-sumed by the insured in the same "insured con-tract";

d. The allegations in the "suit" and the informationwe know about the "occurrence" are such thatno conflict appears to exist between the inter-ests of the insured and the interests of the in-demnitee;

e. The indemnitee and the insured ask us to con-duct and control the defense of that indemniteeagainst such "suit" and agree that we can as-sign the same counsel to defend the insuredand the indemnitee; and

f. The indemnitee:(1) Agrees in writing to:

(a) Cooperate with us in the investigation,settlement or defense of the "suit";

(b) Immediately send us copies of any de-mands, notices, summonses or legal pa-pers received in connection with the"suit";

(c) Notify any other insurer whose coverageis available to the indemnitee; and

(d) Cooperate with us with respect to coordi-nating other applicable insurance avail-able to the indemnitee; and

(2) Provides us with written authorization to:(a) Obtain records and other information

related to the "suit"; and(b) Conduct and control the defense of the

indemnitee in such "suit".So long as the above conditions are met, attorneys'fees incurred by us in the defense of that indem-nitee, necessary litigation expenses incurred by usand necessary litigation expenses incurred by theindemnitee at our request will be paid as Supple-mentary Payments. Notwithstanding the provisionsof Paragraph 2.b.(2) of Section I – Coverage A –Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability, suchpayments will not be deemed to be damages for"bodily injury" and "property damage" and will notreduce the limits of insurance.Our obligation to defend an insured's indemniteeand to pay for attorneys' fees and necessary litiga-tion expenses as Supplementary Payments endswhen:a. We have used up the applicable limit of insur-

ance in the payment of judgments or settle-ments; or

b. The conditions set forth above, or the terms ofthe agreement described in Paragraph f. above,are no longer met.

SECTION II – WHO IS AN INSURED1. If you are designated in the Declarations as:

a. An individual, you and your spouse are insur-eds, but only with respect to the conduct of abusiness of which you are the sole owner.

b. A partnership or joint venture, you are an in-sured. Your members, your partners, and theirspouses are also insureds, but only with respectto the conduct of your business.

c. A limited liability company, you are an insured.Your members are also insureds, but only withrespect to the conduct of your business. Yourmanagers are insureds, but only with respect totheir duties as your managers.

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


d. An organization other than a partnership, jointventure or limited liability company, you are aninsured. Your "executive officers" and directorsare insureds, but only with respect to their du-ties as your officers or directors. Your stock-holders are also insureds, but only with respectto their liability as stockholders.

e. A trust, you are an insured. Your trustees arealso insureds, but only with respect to their du-ties as trustees.

2. Each of the following is also an insured:a. Your "volunteer workers" only while performing

duties related to the conduct of your business,or your "employees", other than either your"executive officers" (if you are an organizationother than a partnership, joint venture or limitedliability company) or your managers (if you area limited liability company), but only for actswithin the scope of their employment by you orwhile performing duties related to the conduct ofyour business. However, none of these "em-ployees" or "volunteer workers" are insuredsfor:

(1) "Bodily injury" or "personal and advertisinginjury":

(a) To you, to your partners or members (ifyou are a partnership or joint venture), toyour members (if you are a limited liabil-ity company), to a co-"employee" while inthe course of his or her employment orperforming duties related to the conductof your business, or to your other "volun-teer workers" while performing duties re-lated to the conduct of your business;

(b) To the spouse, child, parent, brother orsister of that co-"employee" or "volunteerworker" as a consequence of Paragraph(1)(a) above;

(c) For which there is any obligation to sharedamages with or repay someone elsewho must pay damages because of theinjury described in Paragraphs (1)(a) or(b) above; or

(d) Arising out of his or her providing orfailing to provide professional health careservices.

(2) "Property damage" to property:(a) Owned, occupied or used by,

(b) Rented to, in the care, custody or controlof, or over which physical control is beingexercised for any purpose by

you, any of your "employees", "volunteerworkers", any partner or member (if you area partnership or joint venture), or any mem-ber (if you are a limited liability company).

b. Any person (other than your "employee" or"volunteer worker"), or any organization whileacting as your real estate manager.

c. Any person or organization having proper tem-porary custody of your property if you die, butonly:

(1) With respect to liability arising out of themaintenance or use of that property; and

(2) Until your legal representative has beenappointed.

d. Your legal representative if you die, but onlywith respect to duties as such. That representa-tive will have all your rights and duties underthis Coverage Part.

3. Any organization you newly acquire or form, otherthan a partnership, joint venture or limited liabilitycompany, and over which you maintain ownershipor majority interest, will qualify as a Named Insuredif there is no other similar insurance available tothat organization. However:a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only

until the 90th day after you acquire or form theorganization or the end of the policy period,whichever is earlier;

b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or"property damage" that occurred before youacquired or formed the organization; and

c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal andadvertising injury" arising out of an offensecommitted before you acquired or formed theorganization.

No person or organization is an insured with respect tothe conduct of any current or past partnership, jointventure or limited liability company that is not shownas a Named Insured in the Declarations.SECTION III – LIMITS OF INSURANCE1. The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations

and the rules below fix the most we will pay regard-less of the number of:a. Insureds;b. Claims made or "suits" brought; orc. Persons or organizations making claims or

bringing "suits".

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


2. The General Aggregate Limit is the most we willpay for the sum of:a. Medical expenses under Coverage C;b. Damages under Coverage A, except damages

because of "bodily injury" or "property damage"included in the "products-completed operationshazard"; and

c. Damages under Coverage B.3. The Products-Completed Operations Aggregate

Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A fordamages because of "bodily injury" and "propertydamage" included in the "products-completed op-erations hazard".

4. Subject to 2. above, the Personal and AdvertisingInjury Limit is the most we will pay under CoverageB for the sum of all damages because of all "per-sonal and advertising injury" sustained by any oneperson or organization.

5. Subject to 2. or 3. above, whichever applies, theEach Occurrence Limit is the most we will pay forthe sum of:a. Damages under Coverage A; andb. Medical expenses under Coverage Cbecause of all "bodily injury" and "property dam-age" arising out of any one "occurrence".

6. Subject to 5. above, the Damage To PremisesRented To You Limit is the most we will pay underCoverage A for damages because of "propertydamage" to any one premises, while rented to you,or in the case of damage by fire, while rented toyou or temporarily occupied by you with permissionof the owner.

7. Subject to 5. above, the Medical Expense Limit isthe most we will pay under Coverage C for allmedical expenses because of "bodily injury" sus-tained by any one person.

The Limits of Insurance of this Coverage Part applyseparately to each consecutive annual period and toany remaining period of less than 12 months, startingwith the beginning of the policy period shown in theDeclarations, unless the policy period is extended afterissuance for an additional period of less than 12months. In that case, the additional period will bedeemed part of the last preceding period for purposesof determining the Limits of Insurance.SECTION IV – COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITYCONDITIONS1. Bankruptcy

Bankruptcy or insolvency of the insured or of theinsured's estate will not relieve us of our obligationsunder this Coverage Part.

2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense,Claim Or Suita. You must see to it that we are notified as soon

as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offensewhich may result in a claim. To the extent pos-sible, notice should include:

(1) How, when and where the "occurrence" oroffense took place;

(2) The names and addresses of any injuredpersons and witnesses; and

(3) The nature and location of any injury ordamage arising out of the "occurrence" oroffense.

b. If a claim is made or "suit" is brought againstany insured, you must:

(1) Immediately record the specifics of the claimor "suit" and the date received; and

(2) Notify us as soon as practicable.You must see to it that we receive written noticeof the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable.

c. You and any other involved insured must:(1) Immediately send us copies of any de-

mands, notices, summonses or legal papersreceived in connection with the claim or"suit";

(2) Authorize us to obtain records and otherinformation;

(3) Cooperate with us in the investigation orsettlement of the claim or defense againstthe "suit"; and

(4) Assist us, upon our request, in the enforce-ment of any right against any person or or-ganization which may be liable to the in-sured because of injury or damage to whichthis insurance may also apply.

d. No insured will, except at that insured's owncost, voluntarily make a payment, assume anyobligation, or incur any expense, other than forfirst aid, without our consent.

3. Legal Action Against UsNo person or organization has a right under thisCoverage Part:a. To join us as a party or otherwise bring us into a

"suit" asking for damages from an insured; or

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


b. To sue us on this Coverage Part unless all of itsterms have been fully complied with.

A person or organization may sue us to recover onan agreed settlement or on a final judgment againstan insured; but we will not be liable for damagesthat are not payable under the terms of thisCoverage Part or that are in excess of the ap-plicable limit of insurance. An agreed settlementmeans a settlement and release of liability signedby us, the insured and the claimant or the claim-ant's legal representative.

4. Other InsuranceIf other valid and collectible insurance is availableto the insured for a loss we cover under CoveragesA or B of this Coverage Part, our obligations arelimited as follows:a. Primary Insurance

This insurance is primary except when b. belowapplies. If this insurance is primary, our obliga-tions are not affected unless any of the otherinsurance is also primary. Then, we will sharewith all that other insurance by the method de-scribed in c. below.

b. Excess InsuranceThis insurance is excess over:

(1) Any of the other insurance, whether primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis:

(a) That is Fire, Extended Coverage,Builder's Risk, Installation Risk or similarcoverage for "your work";

(b) That is Fire insurance for premisesrented to you or temporarily occupied byyou with permission of the owner;

(c) That is insurance purchased by you tocover your liability as a tenant for "prop-erty damage" to premises rented to youor temporarily occupied by you withpermission of the owner; or

(d) If the loss arises out of the maintenanceor use of aircraft, "autos" or watercraft tothe extent not subject to Exclusion g. ofSection I – Coverage A – Bodily InjuryAnd Property Damage Liability.

(2) Any other primary insurance available to youcovering liability for damages arising out ofthe premises or operations, or the productsand completed operations, for which youhave been added as an additional insuredby attachment of an endorsement.

When this insurance is excess, we will have noduty under Coverages A or B to defend the in-sured against any "suit" if any other insurer hasa duty to defend the insured against that "suit".If no other insurer defends, we will undertake todo so, but we will be entitled to the insured'srights against all those other insurers.When this insurance is excess over other insur-ance, we will pay only our share of the amountof the loss, if any, that exceeds the sum of:

(1) The total amount that all such other insur-ance would pay for the loss in the absenceof this insurance; and

(2) The total of all deductible and self-insuredamounts under all that other insurance.

We will share the remaining loss, if any, withany other insurance that is not described in thisExcess Insurance provision and was not boughtspecifically to apply in excess of the Limits ofInsurance shown in the Declarations of thisCoverage Part.

c. Method Of SharingIf all of the other insurance permits contributionby equal shares, we will follow this method also.Under this approach each insurer contributesequal amounts until it has paid its applicablelimit of insurance or none of the loss remains,whichever comes first.If any of the other insurance does not permitcontribution by equal shares, we will contributeby limits. Under this method, each insurer'sshare is based on the ratio of its applicable limitof insurance to the total applicable limits of in-surance of all insurers.

5. Premium Audita. We will compute all premiums for this Coverage

Part in accordance with our rules and rates.b. Premium shown in this Coverage Part as ad-

vance premium is a deposit premium only. Atthe close of each audit period we will computethe earned premium for that period and sendnotice to the first Named Insured. The due datefor audit and retrospective premiums is the dateshown as the due date on the bill. If the sum ofthe advance and audit premiums paid for thepolicy period is greater than the earned pre-mium, we will return the excess to the firstNamed Insured.

c. The first Named Insured must keep records ofthe information we need for premium computa-tion, and send us copies at such times as wemay request.

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


6. RepresentationsBy accepting this policy, you agree:a. The statements in the Declarations are accurate

and complete;b. Those statements are based upon representa-

tions you made to us; andc. We have issued this policy in reliance upon

your representations.7. Separation Of Insureds

Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance, andany rights or duties specifically assigned in thisCoverage Part to the first Named Insured, this in-surance applies:a. As if each Named Insured were the only Named

Insured; andb. Separately to each insured against whom claim

is made or "suit" is brought.8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others

To UsIf the insured has rights to recover all or part of anypayment we have made under this Coverage Part,those rights are transferred to us. The insured mustdo nothing after loss to impair them. At our request,the insured will bring "suit" or transfer those rightsto us and help us enforce them.

9. When We Do Not RenewIf we decide not to renew this Coverage Part, wewill mail or deliver to the first Named Insuredshown in the Declarations written notice of the non-renewal not less than 30 days before the expirationdate.If notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficientproof of notice.

SECTION V – DEFINITIONS1. "Advertisement" means a notice that is broadcast

or published to the general public or specific mar-ket segments about your goods, products or ser-vices for the purpose of attracting customers orsupporters. For the purposes of this definition:a. Notices that are published include material

placed on the Internet or on similar electronicmeans of communication; and

b. Regarding web-sites, only that part of a web-site that is about your goods, products or ser-vices for the purposes of attracting customersor supporters is considered an advertisement.

2. "Auto" means:a. A land motor vehicle, trailer or semitrailer

designed for travel on public roads, includingany attached machinery or equipment; or

b. Any other land vehicle that is subject to a com-pulsory or financial responsibility law or othermotor vehicle insurance law in the state where itis licensed or principally garaged.

However, "auto" does not include "mobile equip-ment".

3. "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness ordisease sustained by a person, including death re-sulting from any of these at any time.

4. "Coverage territory" means:a. The United States of America (including its

territories and possessions), Puerto Rico andCanada;

b. International waters or airspace, but only if theinjury or damage occurs in the course of travelor transportation between any places includedin a. above; or

c. All other parts of the world if the injury or dam-age arises out of:

(1) Goods or products made or sold by you inthe territory described in a. above;

(2) The activities of a person whose home is inthe territory described in a. above, but isaway for a short time on your business; or

(3) "Personal and advertising injury" offensesthat take place through the Internet or simi-lar electronic means of communication

provided the insured's responsibility to pay dam-ages is determined in a "suit" on the merits, in theterritory described in a. above or in a settlement weagree to.

5. "Employee" includes a "leased worker". "Em-ployee" does not include a "temporary worker".

6. "Executive officer" means a person holding any ofthe officer positions created by your charter, consti-tution, by-laws or any other similar governingdocument.

7. "Hostile fire" means one which becomes uncontrol-lable or breaks out from where it was intended tobe.

8. "Impaired property" means tangible property, otherthan "your product" or "your work", that cannot beused or is less useful because:a. It incorporates "your product" or "your work"

that is known or thought to be defective, defi-cient, inadequate or dangerous; or

b. You have failed to fulfill the terms of a contractor agreement;

if such property can be restored to use by:a. The repair, replacement, adjustment or removal

of "your product" or "your work"; or

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


b. Your fulfilling the terms of the contract oragreement.

9. "Insured contract" means:a. A contract for a lease of premises. However,

that portion of the contract for a lease of prem-ises that indemnifies any person or organizationfor damage by fire to premises while rented toyou or temporarily occupied by you with per-mission of the owner is not an "insured con-tract";

b. A sidetrack agreement;c. Any easement or license agreement, except in

connection with construction or demolition op-erations on or within 50 feet of a railroad;

d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, toindemnify a municipality, except in connectionwith work for a municipality;

e. An elevator maintenance agreement;f. That part of any other contract or agreement

pertaining to your business (including an in-demnification of a municipality in connectionwith work performed for a municipality) underwhich you assume the tort liability of anotherparty to pay for "bodily injury" or "propertydamage" to a third person or organization. Tortliability means a liability that would be imposedby law in the absence of any contract oragreement.Paragraph f. does not include that part of anycontract or agreement:

(1) That indemnifies a railroad for "bodily injury"or "property damage" arising out of con-struction or demolition operations, within 50feet of any railroad property and affectingany railroad bridge or trestle, tracks, road-beds, tunnel, underpass or crossing;

(2) That indemnifies an architect, engineer orsurveyor for injury or damage arising out of:

(a) Preparing, approving, or failing to pre-pare or approve, maps, shop drawings,opinions, reports, surveys, field orders,change orders or drawings and specifica-tions; or

(b) Giving directions or instructions, or failingto give them, if that is the primary causeof the injury or damage; or

(3) Under which the insured, if an architect,engineer or surveyor, assumes liability foran injury or damage arising out of the in-sured's rendering or failure to render profes-sional services, including those listed in (2)above and supervisory, inspection, architec-tural or engineering activities.

10."Leased worker" means a person leased to you bya labor leasing firm under an agreement betweenyou and the labor leasing firm, to perform dutiesrelated to the conduct of your business. "Leasedworker" does not include a "temporary worker".

11."Loading or unloading" means the handling ofproperty:a. After it is moved from the place where it is

accepted for movement into or onto an aircraft,watercraft or "auto";

b. While it is in or on an aircraft, watercraft or"auto"; or

c. While it is being moved from an aircraft, water-craft or "auto" to the place where it is finally de-livered;

but "loading or unloading" does not include themovement of property by means of a mechanicaldevice, other than a hand truck, that is not attachedto the aircraft, watercraft or "auto".

12."Mobile equipment" means any of the followingtypes of land vehicles, including any attached ma-chinery or equipment:a. Bulldozers, farm machinery, forklifts and other

vehicles designed for use principally off publicroads;

b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next topremises you own or rent;

c. Vehicles that travel on crawler treads;d. Vehicles, whether self-propelled or not, main-

tained primarily to provide mobility to perma-nently mounted:

(1) Power cranes, shovels, loaders, diggers ordrills; or

(2) Road construction or resurfacing equipmentsuch as graders, scrapers or rollers;

e. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. abovethat are not self-propelled and are maintainedprimarily to provide mobility to permanently at-tached equipment of the following types:

(1) Air compressors, pumps and generators,including spraying, welding, building clean-ing, geophysical exploration, lighting andwell servicing equipment; or

(2) Cherry pickers and similar devices used toraise or lower workers;

f. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. abovemaintained primarily for purposes other than thetransportation of persons or cargo.However, self-propelled vehicles with the fol-lowing types of permanently attached equip-ment are not "mobile equipment" but will beconsidered "autos":

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


(1) Equipment designed primarily for:(a) Snow removal;(b) Road maintenance, but not construction

or resurfacing; or(c) Street cleaning;

(2) Cherry pickers and similar devices mountedon automobile or truck chassis and used toraise or lower workers; and

(3) Air compressors, pumps and generators,including spraying, welding, building clean-ing, geophysical exploration, lighting andwell servicing equipment.

However, "mobile equipment" does not include anyland vehicles that are subject to a compulsory orfinancial responsibility law or other motor vehicleinsurance law in the state where it is licensed orprincipally garaged. Land vehicles subject to acompulsory or financial responsibility law or othermotor vehicle insurance law are considered"autos".

13."Occurrence" means an accident, including con-tinuous or repeated exposure to substantially thesame general harmful conditions.

14."Personal and advertising injury" means injury,including consequential "bodily injury", arising outof one or more of the following offenses:a. False arrest, detention or imprisonment;b. Malicious prosecution;c. The wrongful eviction from, wrongful entry into,

or invasion of the right of private occupancy of aroom, dwelling or premises that a person oc-cupies, committed by or on behalf of its owner,landlord or lessor;

d. Oral or written publication, in any manner, ofmaterial that slanders or libels a person or or-ganization or disparages a person's or organiza-tion's goods, products or services;

e. Oral or written publication, in any manner, ofmaterial that violates a person's right of privacy;

f. The use of another's advertising idea in your"advertisement"; or

g. Infringing upon another's copyright, trade dressor slogan in your "advertisement".

15."Pollutants" mean any solid, liquid, gaseous orthermal irritant or contaminant, including smoke,vapor, soot, fumes, acids, alkalis, chemicals andwaste. Waste includes materials to be recycled,reconditioned or reclaimed.

16."Products-completed operations hazard":a. Includes all "bodily injury" and "property dam-

age" occurring away from premises you own orrent and arising out of "your product" or "yourwork" except:

(1) Products that are still in your physical pos-session; or

(2) Work that has not yet been completed orabandoned. However, "your work" will bedeemed completed at the earliest of the fol-lowing times:

(a) When all of the work called for in yourcontract has been completed.

(b) When all of the work to be done at thejob site has been completed if your con-tract calls for work at more than one jobsite.

(c) When that part of the work done at a jobsite has been put to its intended use byany person or organization other thananother contractor or subcontractor work-ing on the same project.

Work that may need service, maintenance,correction, repair or replacement, but whichis otherwise complete, will be treated ascompleted.

b. Does not include "bodily injury" or "propertydamage" arising out of:

(1) The transportation of property, unless theinjury or damage arises out of a condition inor on a vehicle not owned or operated byyou, and that condition was created by the"loading or unloading" of that vehicle by anyinsured;

(2) The existence of tools, uninstalled equip-ment or abandoned or unused materials; or

(3) Products or operations for which the classi-fication, listed in the Declarations or in a pol-icy schedule, states that products-completedoperations are subject to the General Ag-gregate Limit.

17."Property damage" means:a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all

resulting loss of use of that property. All suchloss of use shall be deemed to occur at the timeof the physical injury that caused it; or

Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


b. Loss of use of tangible property that is notphysically injured. All such loss of use shall bedeemed to occur at the time of the "occurrence"that caused it.

For the purposes of this insurance, electronic datais not tangible property.As used in this definition, electronic data means in-formation, facts or programs stored as or on, cre-ated or used on, or transmitted to or from computersoftware, including systems and applications soft-ware, hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tapes,drives, cells, data processing devices or any othermedia which are used with electronically controlledequipment.

18."Suit" means a civil proceeding in which damagesbecause of "bodily injury", "property damage" or"personal and advertising injury" to which this in-surance applies are alleged. "Suit" includes:a. An arbitration proceeding in which such dam-

ages are claimed and to which the insured mustsubmit or does submit with our consent; or

b. Any other alternative dispute resolution pro-ceeding in which such damages are claimedand to which the insured submits with our con-sent.

19."Temporary worker" means a person who is fur-nished to you to substitute for a permanent "em-ployee" on leave or to meet seasonal or short-termworkload conditions.

20."Volunteer worker" means a person who is not your"employee", and who donates his or her work andacts at the direction of and within the scope of du-ties determined by you, and is not paid a fee, sal-ary or other compensation by you or anyone elsefor their work performed for you.

21."Your product":a. Means:

(1) Any goods or products, other than realproperty, manufactured, sold, handled, dis-tributed or disposed of by:

(a) You;(b) Others trading under your name; or(c) A person or organization whose business

or assets you have acquired; and(2) Containers (other than vehicles), materials,

parts or equipment furnished in connectionwith such goods or products.

b. Includes(1) Warranties or representations made at any

time with respect to the fitness, quality, du-rability, performance or use of "your prod-uct"; and

(2) The providing of or failure to provide warn-ings or instructions.

c. Does not include vending machines or otherproperty rented to or located for the use of oth-ers but not sold.

22."Your work":a. Means:

(1) Work or operations performed by you or onyour behalf; and

(2) Materials, parts or equipment furnished inconnection with such work or operations.

b. Includes(1) Warranties or representations made at any

time with respect to the fitness, quality, du-rability, performance or use of "your work",and

(2) The providing of or failure to provide warn-ings or instructions.Sample

00 62 16.11


Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle


00 62 16.12


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text


00 62 16.13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 16.13 Certificate of Insurance Form CG 20 37 07 04

Sherri

Typewritten Text

Sherri

Typewritten Text

POLICY NUMBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITYCG 25 04 03 97

THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY.

CG 25 04 03 97 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1996 Page 1 of 2 oo

DESIGNATED LOCATION(S)GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMIT

This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART

SCHEDULE

Designated Location(s):

(If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarationsas applicable to this endorsement.)

A. For all sums which the insured becomes legallyobligated to pay as damages caused by“occurrences” under COVERAGE A (SECTIONI), and for all medical expenses caused by acci-dents under COVERAGE C (SECTION I), whichcan be attributed only to operations at a singledesignated “location” shown in the Scheduleabove:

1. A separate Designated Location GeneralAggregate Limit applies to each designated“location”, and that limit is equal to theamount of the General Aggregate Limitshown in the Declarations.

2. The Designated Location General AggregateLimit is the most we will pay for the sum of alldamages under COVERAGE A, except dam-ages because of “bodily injury” or “propertydamage” included in the “products-completedoperations hazard”, and for medical expensesunder COVERAGE C regardless of the num-ber of:

a. Insureds;

b. Claims made or “suits” brought; or

c. Persons or organizations making claimsor bringing “suits”.

3. Any payments made under COVERAGE Afor damages or under COVERAGE C formedical expenses shall reduce the Desig-nated Location General Aggregate Limit forthat designated “location”. Such paymentsshall not reduce the General Aggregate Limitshown in the Declarations nor shall they re-duce any other Designated Location GeneralAggregate Limit for any other designated“location” shown in the Schedule above.

4. The limits shown in the Declarations for EachOccurrence, Fire Damage and Medical Ex-pense continue to apply. However, instead ofbeing subject to the General Aggregate Limitshown in the Declarations, such limits will besubject to the applicable Designated LocationGeneral Aggregate Limit.

Sample

00 62 16.14


Sherri

Typewritten Text

Page 2 of 2 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1996 CG 25 04 03 97 oo

B. For all sums which the insured becomes legallyobligated to pay as damages caused by“occurrences” under COVERAGE A (SECTIONI), and for all medical expenses caused by acci-dents under COVERAGE C (SECTION I), whichcannot be attributed only to operations at a sin-gle designated “location” shown in the Scheduleabove:

1. Any payments made under COVERAGE Afor damages or under COVERAGE C formedical expenses shall reduce the amountavailable under the General Aggregate Limitor the Products-Completed Operations Ag-gregate Limit, whichever is applicable; and

2. Such payments shall not reduce any DesignatedLocation General Aggregate Limit.

C. When coverage for liability arising out of the“products-completed operations hazard” is pro-vided, any payments for damages because of“bodily injury” or “property damage” included inthe “products-completed operations hazard” willreduce the Products-Completed Operations Ag-gregate Limit, and not reduce the General Ag-gregate Limit nor the Designated Location Gen-eral Aggregate Limit.

D. For the purposes of this endorsement, the Defi-nitions Section is amended by the addition ofthe following definition:

“Location” means premises involving the sameor connecting lots, or premises whose connec-tion is interrupted only by a street, roadway, wa-terway or right-of-way of a railroad.

E. The provisions of Limits Of Insurance (SECTIONIII) not otherwise modified by this endorsementshall continue to apply as stipulated.

Sample


00 62 16.14


Sherri

Typewritten Text

sherri

Rectangle

00 62 73SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 73 - 1 G703 Schedule of Values (Continuation Sheet)

00 62 76 - SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 76 - 1 G702 - Application for Payment

SECTION 00 62 76.13

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 76.13 – 1 Sales Tax Form

SALES TAX FORM DATE: VENDOR: Vendor Name

Vendor Address

Vendor City, State Zip I hereby certify under penalties of perjury, that: I am engaged in the performance of a construction contract on a project for the University of Maine System which is a Sales Tax exempt organization under the Maine Sales and Use Tax Law, Section 1760, subsection 2 and 16:

This project is titled: UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION Project Title The project is located at: UNIVERSITY OF MAINE Campus Name or Town This certificate is issued to cover purchases of materials that will be permanently incorporated into the real property belonging to the exempt organization or government agency indicated above. Signed: Authorized Signature Name &Title: Firm Name: Firm Address: Firm City, State Zip


Document G707A™

– 1994Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage

AIA Document G707A™ – 19 94 . Copyright © 1971, 1982 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 22:31:00 ET on 03/03/2021 under Order No.2908190133 which expires on 06/22/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail [email protected] Notes: (3B9ADA5C)

1

PROJECT:(Name and address) ’ARCHITECT S PROJECT NUMBER: Samples

CONTRACT FOR:

TO OWNER: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: University of Maine Systemby and throughUniversity of Maine5765 Service BuildingOrono, ME 04469

OWNER:

ARCHITECT:

CONTRACTOR:

SURETY:

OTHER:

In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the (Insert name and address of Surety)

, SURETY,on bond of (Insert name and address of Contractor)

, CONTRACTOR,hereby approves the reduction in or partial release of retainage to the Contractor as follows:

The Surety agrees that such reduction in or partial release of retainage to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety of any of its obligations to(Insert name and address of Owner)

, OWNER,as set forth in said Surety's bond.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date: (Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.)

(Surety)

(Signature of authorized representative)

Attest: (Seal): (Printed name and title)

00 62 76.16 SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 76.16 - 1 Consent of Surety to Reduction

STORED MATERIALS

University of Maine System by and throughUniversity of Maine 5765 Service BuildingOrono ME 04469

Project Title:

Location:

Contractor:

Materials and/or equipment (hereinafter “Materials”) that have not yet been incorporated into the work may be delivered and suitably stored, at the site or some other location agreed upon by the Owner. The Materials listed below have been estimated at 100% of the cost and will be stored at . The Owner will reimburse the Contractor based upon the prices included on the Schedule of Values Form, 00 62 73(AIA G703), less the cost of installation. The Contractor must complete sufficient copies of this Stored Materials Form, 00 62 79, to accompany the Application for Payment. The Contractor shall secure the signature of its bonding company on all forms and shall also provide a Power of Attorney from the bonding company.

SCHEDULE

Qty Material/Equipment Item in AIA G703 Unit Wholesale Price

Extended Wholesale Price

Item No Unit Price

Total

Surety By: Power of Attorney Must be Attached Attorney-in-Fact

Date:

BILL OF SALE

The Contractor, , (will store/has stored) certain Materials (at the site of this project/at an approved warehouse/at bonded warehouse) and will be paid in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. In consideration of the sum of $ paid to the contractor by the Owner, and, incompliance with the provisions of the Contract, and, with the intention to be legally bound, the Contractor does hereby grant, bargain, sell and deliver unto the Owner, it successors and assigns, all and singular, the Materials described in the schedule above. The Contractor agrees that:

1. Contractor has good title to the Materials, free and clear of all liens and encumbrances, and title is grantedto the Owner;

2. The Materials will be used only in the construction of the above referenced project, under the provisionsof the Contract, and will not be diverted elsewhere without the prior written consent of the Owner;

3. The Materials have been delivered to and are at the places approved for storage, and they are clearlymarked and identified as the property of the Owner and are stored in a safe and secure manner to protectfrom damage or loss;

00 62 79SAMPLE

University of Maine

DP Corbett HVAC Renovation

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 79 - 1 Stored Materials Form

jenni

Line

4. The Contractor will pay all expenses in connection with the sale, delivery, storage, protection andinsurance of Materials granted to the Owner.

5. The Contractor will remain responsible for the Materials, which will remain under its custody and controlfor all losses, and will fully indemnify the Owner for the cost of the Materials should the Materials be lostor damaged or stolen, regardless of exclusions in insurance policies required under this document. Thecontractor has insured the Materials against loss or damage by fire (with extended coverage), theft andburglary, with loss payable to the Owner;

6. The Contractor agrees that the quantities of Materials set forth in the Schedule of Values Form representsthe maximum quantities for which it may be entitled to payment under the provisions of the contract;

7. The following information is included with this form:

(1) An Application for Payment;(2) An invoice or copy of an invoice for Materials stored;(3) Evidence of payment, or when payment has not been made, a letter on the Contractor’sletterhead authorizing payment to be made jointly to the Contractor and the Supplier;(4) Photographs showing the stored Materials and its location;(5) a fire and theft insurance policy rider for the stored Materials.(6) a warehouseman’s receipt acknowledging that the Materials being stored at the warehouseare being held for the benefit of the Contractor or/or University.

Witness: By: (SEAL)

Principal/Contractor-Individual

Witness: Principal/Contractor-Individual

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

Attest:

By:

Principal/Contractor-Corporation

Secretary President


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 62 79 - 2 Stored Materials Form

00 63 14SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 63 14 - 1 G716 - Request for Information

00 63 33SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 63 33 - 1 G710 - Architect's Supplemental Instructions

00 63 46SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 63 46 - 1 G714 - Construction Change Directive

00 63 57SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 63 57 - 1 G709 - Work Changes Proposal Request Form

Document G701™

– 2017Change Order

AIA Document G701™ – 20 17 . Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000 , 2001 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:57:09 ET on 03/26/2021 under Order No.2908190133 which expires on 06/22/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail [email protected] Notes: (3B9ADA4C)

1

PROJECT: (Name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION: CHANGE ORDER INFORMATION:Samples Contract For: Change Order Number:

Date: Date:

OWNER: (Name and address) ARCHITECT: (Name and address) CONTRACTOR: (Name and address)University of Maine Systemby and throughUniversity of Maine5765 Service BuildingOrono, ME 04469

THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS:(Insert a detailed description of the change and, if applicable, attach or reference specific exhibits. Also include agreed upon adjustments attributable to executed Construction Change Directives.)

The original Contract Sum was $ 0.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ 0.00 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 0.00The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of $ 0.00The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be $ 0.00

The Contract Time will be increased by Zero (0) days.The new date of Substantial Completion will be

NOTE: This Change Order does not include adjustments to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, or the Contract Time, that have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive.

NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER.

ARCHITECT (Firm name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name)

SIGNATURE SIGNATURE SIGNATURE

PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE

DATE DATE DATE

00 63 63SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 63 63 - 1 G701 - Change Order

Document G704™

– 2017Certificate of Substantial Completion

AIA Document G704™ – 20 17 . Copyright © 1963, 1978, 1992, 2000 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 22:45:55 ET on 03/03/2021 under Order No.2908190133 which expires on 06/22/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail [email protected] Notes: (3B9ADA4A)

1

PROJECT: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION: CERTIFICATE INFORMATION:Samples Contract For: Certificate Number:

Date: Date:

OWNER: (name and address) ARCHITECT: (name and address) CONTRACTOR: (name and address)University of Maine Systemby and throughUniversity of Maine5765 Service BuildingOrono, ME 04469

The Work identified below has been reviewed and found, to the Architect’s best knowledge, information, and belief, to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion designated below is the date established by this Certificate.(Identify the Work, or portion thereof, that is substantially complete.)

ARCHITECT (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

WARRANTIESThe date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion designated above is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below:(Identify warranties that do not commence on the date of Substantial Completion, if any, and indicate their date of commencement.)

WORK TO BE COMPLETED OR CORRECTEDA list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto, or transmitted as agreed upon by the parties, and identified as follows:(Identify the list of Work to be completed or corrected.)

The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing, the date of commencement of warranties for items on the attached list will be the date of issuance of the final Certificate of Payment or the date of final payment, whichever occurs first. The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within ( ) days from the above date of Substantial Completion.

Cost estimate of Work to be completed or corrected: $

The responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, insurance, and other items identified below shall be as follows: (Note: Owner’s and Contractor’s legal and insurance counsel should review insurance requirements and coverage.)

The Owner and Contractor hereby accept the responsibilities assigned to them in this Certificate of Substantial Completion:

CONTRACTOR (Firm Name)

SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE

OWNER (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE

00 65 16SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 16 - 1 G704 - Certificate of Substantial Completion

SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 19 – 1 Certificate of Completion Form

SECTION 00 65 19 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION FORM

(Final) DATE: PROJECT NAME: UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE: FINAL COMPLETION is defined, in accordance with Article 9 of the A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as the date certified by the Architect when all the Work of the Project is fully complete, the Close-Out requirements of Paragraph 9.10 of the General Conditions have been completed, including the Close-Out Meeting and approval of Close-Out by the Architect, in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2, and the Contract fully performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor entitled to final payment. The CONTRACTOR certifies that the Work is fully completed and was completed on or before , 20 , and submits herewith: Application for Final Payment (AIA G702) Affidavit of Payments (AIA G706) Consent of Surety (AIA G707) Releases of Liens (AIA G706A) Waiver of Lien CONTRACTOR: By: Date:

Name: The ARCHITECT has inspected the Work and has determined that the Date of Final Completion was , 20 . ARCHITECT: By: Date:

Name: The OWNER hereby accepts the Work as fully complete and will make final payment. OWNER: By: Date: Name:


00 65 19.13 SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 19.13 - 1 G706 - Contractor's Affidavit of Payment

00 65 19.16 SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 19.16 - 1 G706A - Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens

SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 19.17 – 1 Waiver of Lien

SECTION 00 65 19.17 WAIVER OF LIEN

DATE: State of Maine County of Penobscot TO: University of Maine System

by and through University of Maine 5765 Service Building Orono, ME 04469

SUBJECT:

Project Name: UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION Project Location: UNIVERSITY OF MAINE Upon receipt of the sum of (being the balance due us under the existing contract or subcontract agreement for work on the Subject Project) the undersigned agrees that it will waive and release the University of Maine System from any and all lien or claim or right to lien on the Subject Project under the Statutes of the state of Maine relating to liens for labor, materials and/or subcontracts furnished for the Subject Project on premises belonging to the University of Maine System. Signed: Title: Firm Name: NOTARY Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 . Signature Notary Public


SECTION 00 65 19.18

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 19.18 - 1 Subcontractor-Supplier Conditional Release

SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER CONDITIONAL

RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIEN SAMPLE

DATE: State of Maine County of Penobscot SUBJECT: Project Name: UM DP CORBETT HVAC RENOVATION Project Location: UNIVERSITY OF MAINE ___________________________________(hereinafter called the Subcontractor) in consideration of the sum of $__________________________________________________________________to be paid to Subcontractor by__________________________________upon receipt of said payment does hereby release and forever discharge ________________________________and the University of Maine System from any and all workman’s, materialman’s, mechanic’s, building or other liens, claims, causes of action, liabilities and other obligations with respect to the value of any and all work, services and materials furnished, performed, or supplied by the subcontractor to or in connection with the construction project known as the Insert Project Name Here located in Insert Location Here (hereinafter called the “Premises”) through the date of _____________________________. Subcontractor shall take all reasonable action to discharge any lien currently filed or pending against __________________________ and the University of Maine System, including without limitation the recording of instruments discharging said lien with the appropriate Registry of Deeds. Subcontractor acknowledges that its receipt of said payment will constitute full and final payment for all work performed by Subcontractor through the date set forth above except for retainage if applicable, in the amount of ($)_______________________________. Subcontractor further covenants and represents that all of the subcontract suppliers, mechanics, materialmen, and laborers listed below engaged by Subcontractor have been paid in full (less proper retainage if any) or shall be immediately paid in full from the proceeds of this current payment for all work done and or materials furnished to the Premises through the date set forth in the first paragraph above. The Subcontractor hereby agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold ___________________________________ and The University of Maine System harmless from any and all claims, including but not limited to attorney fees, claims for payment, and liens of any kind or nature filed or made by any person or entity based upon work done or materials furnished in connection with the Premises by the Subcontractor or any sub-subcontractor, suppliers, mechanics, materialmen, and laborers employed by Subcontractor through the date set forth in the first paragraph above. Subcontractor shall request any sub-subcontractor, suppliers, mechanics, materialmen, and laborers employed by Subcontractor through the date set forth in the first paragraph above to, and shall itself, take all reasonable action to discharge any lien in connection with payments owed by Subcontractor currently filed or pending against __________________________ and the University of Maine System, including without limitation the recording of instruments discharging said lien with the appropriate Registry of Deeds. Major sub-subcontractors and suppliers whose contract or purchase order meets or exceeds $5,000 working for said Subcontractor for the period stated above:

SECTION 00 65 19.18

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 19.18 - 2 Subcontractor-Supplier Conditional Release

The undersigned represents that he is authorized by all corporate or other action necessary to execute and deliver this release. Signed: Title: Firm Name: NOTARY Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 . Signature Notary Public


00 65 19.19 SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 65 19.19 - 1 G707 - Consent of Surety to Final Payment

Document A201®

– 2017General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Init.

/

AIA Document A201® – 20 17 . Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:46:40 ET on 06/17/2021 under Order No.2908190133 which expires on 07/02/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail [email protected] Notes: (2035306326)

1

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document A503™, Guide for Supplementary Conditions.

for the following PROJECT:(Name and location or address)

THE OWNER:(Name, legal status and address)

University of Maine Systemby and throughUniversity of Maine5765 Service BuildingOrono, ME 04469

THE ARCHITECT:(Name, legal status and address)

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ARCHITECT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

00 72 00SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 72 00 - 1 A201 - General Conditions of the Contract

Init.

/


2

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES


Init.

/


3

INDEX(Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Acceptance of Work9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3Access to Work3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1Accident Prevention10Acts and Omissions3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2Addenda1.1.1Additional Costs, Claims for3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Additional Inspections and Testing9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4Additional Time, Claims for3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5Advertisement or Invitation to Bid1.1.1Aesthetic Effect4.2.13Allowances3.8Applications for Payment4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10Approvals2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1Arbitration8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT4Architect, Definition of4.1.1Architect, Extent of Authority2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4Architect’s Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5Architect’s Approvals2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7

Architect’s Authority to Reject Work3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1Architect’s Copyright1.1.7, 1.5Architect’s Decisions3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2Architect’s Inspections3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Architect’s Instructions3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2Architect’s Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Architect’s Project Representative4.2.10Architect’s Relationship with Contractor1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3Architect’s Representations9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Architect’s Site Visits3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Asbestos10.3.1Attorneys’ Fees3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3Award of Separate Contracts6.1.1, 6.1.2Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work5.2Basic Definitions1.1Bidding Requirements1.1.1Binding Dispute Resolution8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1Bonds, Lien7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Bonds, Performance, and Payment7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5Building Information Models Use and Reliance1.8Building Permit3.7.1Capitalization1.3Certificate of Substantial Completion9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5


Init.

/


4

Certificates for Payment4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval13.4.4Certificates of Insurance9.10.2Change Orders1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2Change Orders, Definition of7.2.1CHANGES IN THE WORK2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5Claims, Definition of15.1.1Claims, Notice of1.6.2, 15.1.3CLAIMS AND DISPUTES3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims15.4.1Claims for Additional Cost3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Claims for Additional Time3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for3.7.4Claims for Damages3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Claims Subject to Arbitration15.4.1Cleaning Up3.15, 6.3Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Communications3.9.1, 4.2.4Completion, Conditions Relating to3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND9Completion, Substantial3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Compliance with Laws2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3

Concealed or Unknown Conditions3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3Conditions of the Contract1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4Consent, Written3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2Consolidation or Joinder15.4.4CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS1.1.4, 6Construction Change Directive, Definition of7.3.1Construction Change Directives1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1Construction Schedules, Contractor’s3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts5.4, 14.2.2.2Continuing Contract Performance15.1.4Contract, Definition of1.1.2CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14Contract Administration3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3Contract Documents, Definition of1.1.1Contract Sum2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Contract Sum, Definition of9.1Contract Time1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5Contract Time, Definition of8.1.1CONTRACTOR3Contractor, Definition of3.1, 6.1.2Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2


Init.

/


5

Contractor’s Employees2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Contractor’s Liability Insurance11.1Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1Contractor’s Representations3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents3.2Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work2.2.2, 9.7Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.1Contractor’s Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Contractor’s Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Coordination and Correlation1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11Copyrights1.5, 3.17Correction of Work2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents1.2Cost, Definition of7.3.4Costs2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14Cutting and Patching3.14, 6.2.5

Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damage to the Work3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damages, Claims for3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Damages for Delay6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of8.1.3Day, Definition of8.1.4Decisions of the Architect3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2Decisions to Withhold Certification9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1Definitions1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1Delays and Extensions of Time3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Digital Data Use and Transmission1.7Disputes6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2Documents and Samples at the Site3.11Drawings, Definition of1.1.5Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of3.11Effective Date of Insurance8.2.2Emergencies10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5Employees, Contractor’s3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Equipment, Labor, or Materials1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Execution and Progress of the Work1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4


Init.

/


6

Extensions of Time3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Failure of Payment9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)Final Completion and Final Payment4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Financial Arrangements, Owner’s2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4GENERAL PROVISIONS1Governing Law13.1Guarantees (See Warranty)Hazardous Materials and Substances10.2.4, 10.3Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers5.2.1Indemnification3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3Information and Services Required of the Owner2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Initial Decision15.2Initial Decision Maker, Definition of1.1.8Initial Decision Maker, Decisions14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Injury or Damage to Person or Property10.2.8, 10.4Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4Instructions to Bidders1.1.1Instructions to the Contractor3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2Instruments of Service, Definition of1.1.7Insurance6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration11.1.4, 11.2.3Insurance, Contractor’s Liability11.1Insurance, Effective Date of8.2.2, 14.4.2Insurance, Owner’s Liability11.2Insurance, Property10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5

Insurance, Stored Materials9.3.2INSURANCE AND BONDS11Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy9.9.1Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of11.5Intent of the Contract Documents1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13Interest13.5Interpretation1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1Interpretations, Written4.2.11, 4.2.12Judgment on Final Award15.4.2Labor and Materials, Equipment1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Labor Disputes8.3.1Laws and Regulations1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Liens2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Limitations, Statutes of12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Limitations of Liability3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1Limitations of Time2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5Materials, Hazardous10.2.4, 10.3Materials, Labor, Equipment and1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2Mechanic’s Lien2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Mediation8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1Minor Changes in the Work1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4


Init.

/


7

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS13Modifications, Definition of1.1.1Modifications to the Contract1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2Mutual Responsibility6.2Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2Notice1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance11.1.4, 11.2.3Notice of Claims1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1Notice of Testing and Inspections13.4.1, 13.4.2Observations, Contractor’s3.2, 3.7.4Occupancy2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8Orders, Written1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1OWNER2Owner, Definition of2.1.1Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4Owner, Information and Services Required of the2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Owner’s Authority1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7Owner’s Insurance11.2Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work2.5, 14.2.2

Owner’s Right to Clean Up6.3Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts6.1Owner’s Right to Stop the Work2.4Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work14.3Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.2, 14.4Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3Partial Occupancy or Use9.6.6, 9.9Patching, Cutting and3.14, 6.2.5Patents3.17Payment, Applications for4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment, Certificates for4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4Payment, Failure of9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Payment, Final4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment Bond, Performance Bond and7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Payments, Progress9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION9Payments to Subcontractors5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2PCB10.3.1Performance Bond and Payment Bond7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF10Polychlorinated Biphenyl10.3.1Product Data, Definition of3.12.2Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Progress and Completion4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Progress Payments9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4


Init.

/


8

Project, Definition of1.1.4Project Representatives4.2.10Property Insurance10.2.5, 11.2Proposal Requirements1.1.1PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY10Regulations and Laws1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Rejection of Work4.2.6, 12.2.1Releases and Waivers of Liens9.3.1, 9.10.2Representations3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Representatives2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10Retainage9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor3.12Rights and Remedies1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4Royalties, Patents and Copyrights3.17Rules and Notices for Arbitration15.4.1Safety of Persons and Property10.2, 10.4Safety Precautions and Programs3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4Samples, Definition of3.12.3Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Samples at the Site, Documents and3.11Schedule of Values9.2, 9.3.1Schedules, Construction3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Separate Contracts and Contractors1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2Separate Contractors, Definition of6.1.1Shop Drawings, Definition of3.12.1Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Site, Use of3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Site Inspections3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Site Visits, Architect’s3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Special Inspections and Testing4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4Specifications, Definition of1.1.6Specifications1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14Statute of Limitations15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Stopping the Work2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1Stored Materials6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4Subcontractor, Definition of5.1.1SUBCONTRACTORS5Subcontractors, Work by1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7Subcontractual Relations5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Submittal Schedule3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7Subrogation, Waivers of6.1.1, 11.3Substances, Hazardous10.3Substantial Completion4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Substantial Completion, Definition of9.8.1Substitution of Subcontractors5.2.3, 5.2.4Substitution of Architect2.3.3Substitutions of Materials3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8Sub-subcontractor, Definition of5.1.2


Init.

/


9

Subsurface Conditions3.7.4Successors and Assigns13.2Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Suppliers1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1Surety5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7Surety, Consent of9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Surveys1.1.7, 2.3.4Suspension by the Owner for Convenience14.3Suspension of the Work3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3Suspension or Termination of the Contract5.4.1.1, 14Taxes3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4Termination by the Contractor14.1, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Cause5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Convenience14.4Termination of the Architect2.3.3Termination of the Contractor Employment14.2.2

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT14Tests and Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4TIME8Time, Delays and Extensions of3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Time Limits2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4Time Limits on Claims3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3Title to Work9.3.2, 9.3.3UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK12Uncovering of Work12.1Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3Unit Prices7.3.3.2, 9.1.2Use of Documents1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3Use of Site3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Values, Schedule of9.2, 9.3.1Waiver of Claims by the Architect13.3.2Waiver of Claims by the Contractor9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7Waiver of Claims by the Owner9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Consequential Damages14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Liens9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4Waivers of Subrogation6.1.1, 11.3Warranty3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2Weather Delays8.3, 15.1.6.2Work, Definition of1.1.3Written Consent1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2Written Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Written Orders1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1


Init.

/


10

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS§ 1.1 Basic Definitions§ 1.1.1 The Contract DocumentsThe Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements.

§ 1.1.2 The ContractThe Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

§ 1.1.3 The WorkThe term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 The ProjectThe Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors.

§ 1.1.5 The DrawingsThe Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 The SpecificationsThe Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 Instruments of ServiceInstruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 Initial Decision MakerThe Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. The Architect is the Initial Decision Maker for this Agreement.

§ 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.


Init.

/


11

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. Where the Procurement Requirements include provisions that portions of the Work be File Bid in accordance with the requirements of the Maine Bid Depository System, the subcontracts for these portions of the work will cover the same scope of work as defined by the Procurement Requirements and the File Bid and shall have the same contract amount as listed in the successful bid.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 CapitalizationTerms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 InterpretationIn the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. The provisions of this section shall not be deemed to modify the contract between the University of Maine System (the Owner) and the Architect under B102-2017 and B201-2017.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants. The provisions of this section shall not be deemed to modify the contract between the University of Maine System (the Owner) and the Architect under B102-2017 and B201-2017.

§ 1.6 Notice§ 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement.

§ 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery.


Init.

/


12

§ 1.7 Digital Data Use and TransmissionThe parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document may use AIA Document G201-2013 Project Digital Data Protocol Form and E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data.

§ 1.8 Building Information Models Use and RelianceAny use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document G202™–2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party’s sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER§ 2.1 General§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.

.1 For the purpose of this Contract, the Owner is defined as: University of Maine System, acting through its duly authorized agent.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

§ 2.2 Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements

§ 2.2.1 Prior to Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor’s request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately.appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor’s request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents.


Init.

/


13

After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.

§ 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as "confidential," the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose "confidential" information, after seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose "confidential" information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information.

§ 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as "confidential," the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose "confidential" information, after seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose "confidential" information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information.

§ 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner§ 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Architect is a person or entity lawfully licensed to practice in the State of Maine. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. Whenever the prime professional designer for the Work is an Engineer, the term Architect, wherever used in these documents shall have the term Engineer substituted for the term Architect. The Engineer shall be lawfully licensed to practice engineering in the State of Maine or an entity lawfully practicing engineering identified as such in the Agreement.

§ 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.at all times conduct safe performance of the Work, including but not limited to appropriate precautions.

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services.

§ 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the WorkIf the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner


Init.

/


14

to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the WorkIf the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR§ 3.1 General§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

§ 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,


Init.

/


15

inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best industry standard or better skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor’s proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 Labor and Materials§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

§ 3.4.2.1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and Architect may consider a formal request for substitution of products in place of those specified. The Owner shall deduct from the next payment made from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect to evaluate the Contractor’s proposed substitutions and to make agreed-upon changes in the Drawings and Specifications made necessary by the Owner’s acceptance of the substitutions.By making requests for substitutions, the Contractor

.1 Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;

.2 Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified;

.3 Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and,

.4 Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be completed in all respects.

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.4.4 If a wage scale prepared by the State of Maine Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards, is included in the Contract Documents, such wage scale represents the minimum wages that must be paid in each category of labor employed on the project.


Init.

/


16

The provisions of Title 26 MRSA Chapter 15 Preference to Maine Workers and Contractors, apply to this project, including but not limited to:

§ 1310. Wage and benefits rates to be kept postedA clearly legible statement of all fair minimum wage and benefits rates to be paid the several classes of laborers, workers and mechanics employed on the construction on the public work must be kept posted in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site by each contractor and subcontractor subject to sections 1304 to 1313.

§ 1311. Wage and benefit record of contractorThe contractor and each subcontractor in charge of the construction of a public work shall keep an accurate record showing the names and occupation of all laborers, workers and mechanics employed by them and all independent contractors working under contract with them in connection with the construction on the public works. The record must also show for all laborers, workers, mechanics and independent contractors the hours worked, the title of the job, the hourly rate or other method of remuneration and the actual wages or other compensation paid to each of the laborers, workers, mechanics and independent contractors. A copy of such a record must be kept at the job site and must be open at all reasonable hours to the inspection of the Bureau of Labor Standards and the public authority that let the contract and its officers and agents. It is not necessary to preserve those records for a period longer than 3 years after the termination of the contract. A copy of each such record must also be filed monthly with the public authority that let the contract. The filed record is a public record pursuant to Title 1, chapter 13, except that the public authority letting a contract shall adopt rules to protect the privacy of personal information contained in the records filed with the public authority under this section, such as Social Security numbers and taxpayer identification numbers. The rules may not prevent the disclosure of information regarding the classification of workers or independent contractors and the remuneration they receive. Such rules are routine technical rules as defined by Title 5, chapter 375, subchapter 2-A.

§ 3.4.5 If a wage scale prepared by the U.S. Department of Labor pursuant to the provision of the Davis-Bacon Act is included in the Contract Documents, such wage scale represents the minimum wages that must be paid in each category of labor on the project. The requirements and responsibilities within the Davis-Bacon Act apply to this project if a Davis-Bacon wage scale is included.

§ 3.4.6 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITYDuring the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

.1 The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, including transgender status or gender expression, national origin or citizenship status, ancestry, age, disability, genetic information, or veterans status. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotions, transfers, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoffs or terminations; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship.

.2 The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, including transgender status or gender expression, national origin or citizenship status, ancestry, age, disability, genetic information, or veterans status.

.3 The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of the workers with which there is a collective or bargaining agreement in place, or other contract or understanding, whereby labor is being furnished for the performances of his contract, a notice, as set forth by the Maine Human Rights Commission, found on their website (https://www1.maine.gov/mhrc/guidance/mhra_guarantees.htm), to be provided by the contracting department or agency, advising the said labor union or workers’ representative of the contractor’s commitment under the provisions of the contract, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and to applicants for employment.

.4 The contractor will cause the foregoing provisions to be inserted in all contracts for any work covered by this agreement so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor.

.5 Contractors and subcontractors with contracts in excess of $50,000 will also pursue in good faith affirmative action programs.


Init.

/


17

§ 3.5 Warranty§ 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4.

§ 3.6 TaxesThe Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

§ 3.6.1 The University of Maine System is exempt from payment of taxes under the Maine Sales and Use Tax Law Title 36 Section 1760 for taxes on materials that are permanently incorporated into the real property belonging to the University of Maine System. The University of Maine System is also exempt from the payment of Federal Excise Taxes on articles not for resale and from the Federal Transportation Tax on all shipments; exemption certificates for these taxes will be furnished when required. All quotations shall be less these taxes. The contractor shall pay all other taxes that have been or are legally enacted.

§ 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown ConditionsIf the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. disturbed. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim proceed as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall


Init.

/


18

continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.8 Allowances§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all

required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 Superintendent§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project.

.1 The Contractor shall provide an updated Construction Schedule with each Application for Payment reflecting actual construction progress and activities.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.


Init.

/


19

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the SiteThe Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities


Init.

/


20

for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

§ 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect.

§ 3.12.11 The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submission and two (2) resubmittals. The Architects review of additional submittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after notification by the Architect. The Owner shall deduct from the next payment made from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional submittals.

§ 3.13 Use of SiteThe Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 Cutting and Patching§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 Cleaning Up§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.15.3 Waste Management. The University is committed to a resource management strategy which reduces to a minimum the production of waste material while reusing, recycling or composting as much as possible of the remaining materials. Contractor will submit a construction waste management plan for the project that identifies opportunities to reduce, reuse, or recycle waste from renovations or new construction.


Init.

/


21

§ 3.16 Access to WorkThe Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

§ 3.17 Royalties, Patents and CopyrightsThe Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

§ 3.18 Indemnification§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT§ 4.1 General§ 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.2 Administration of the Contract§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the final payment is due, and from time to time during the period for correction of Work described in § 12.2, and until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents.


Init.

/


22

.1 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for compensation paid to the Architect for additional site visits made necessary by the fault, neglect as determined solely by the Owner, or request of the Contractor. The reimbursement shall be deducted from the next payment made from the Contract Sum following the Owner’s payment to the Architect.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect’s services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives.


Init.

/


23

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS§ 5.1 Definitions§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

.1 The Contractor shall provide Owner a list of all subcontractors and independent contractors on the job site and a record of the entity to whom that subcontractor or independent contractor is directly contracted and by whom that subcontractor or independent contractor is insured for workers’ compensation purposes. The list shall be presented at the preconstruction meeting and, when changes occur, at each requisition meeting as necessary.

.2 Where the use of the Maine Bid Depository is required by the Procurement Requirements, Subcontractors included in the Contractor’s Proposal shall be the Subcontractors for the defined Work unless a change has been approved by the Owner.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.


Init.

/


24

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 Subcontractual RelationsBy appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS§ 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts§ 6.1.1 The term "Separate Contractor(s)" shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised.


Init.

/


25

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12.

§ 6.2 Mutual Responsibility§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or Separate Contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean UpIf a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK§ 7.1 General§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.1.4 The combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner of a Change in the Work shall be based on a previously agreed upon unit pricing or on the following schedule allowing for appropriate allowances for contract duration:

.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, 20% of the cost.

.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractors, 10% of the amount due the Subcontractors.

.3 For each Subcontractor involved, for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s own forces, 20% of the cost.


Init.

/


26

.4 For each Subcontractor involved, for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractors, 10% of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor.

.5 Costs to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be limited to the following:.1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits

required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated

or consumed;.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the

Contractor or others; and,.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds, insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to

the Work.

§ 7.1.5 When there is only an extension of Contract Time, any Claim for delay made pursuant to Article 15 is limited to additional costs related to supervision and field office personnel, which may be included in the overhead and profit calculation.

§ 7.1.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they are to be itemized also. In no case will a change be approved without such itemization.

§ 7.2 Change Orders§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;


Init.

/


27

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and

.5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

§ 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 Minor Changes in the WorkThe Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect’s order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect’s order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8 TIME§ 8.1 Definitions§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.


Init.

/


28

§ 8.2 Progress and Completion§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION§ 9.1 Contract Sum§ 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 9.2 Schedule of ValuesWhere the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 Applications for Payment§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.


Init.

/


29

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.1.3 The provisions of Title 5 M.R.S.A § 1746, as amended, pertain to this project. The Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of each payment due the Contractor as part of the security for the fulfillment of the Contract Agreement by the Contractor; the Contractor shall not withhold a greater percentage from subcontractors. The Owner may, if deemed expedient by the Owner, cause the Contractor to be paid temporarily or permanently from time to time during the progress of the work, such portion of the amount retained as the Owner deems prudent or desirable.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 Certificates for Payment§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification§ 9.5.1 The Architect may shall withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may shall also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may shall nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of


Init.

/


30

.1 defective Work, i.e. Work that does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, shall include, but not be limited to, non-conforming Work, disputed Work, incomplete Work, and unacceptable Work, which is not remedied;.1 The Architect shall deduct and withhold from any certification for payment an amount equal to one hundred and fifty percent (150%) the value of any defective Work.

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment.

§ 9.6 Progress Payments§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary


Init.

/


31

liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted.

§ 9.6.9 All Progress Payments and Final Payment are subject to the requirements of the "Maine Prompt Pay Act" Title 10 M.R.S.A. ch. 201-A, as amended. Payments shall be made on a timely basis in accord with the requirements of this Statute; however, the Contractor waives interest on any late payment.

§ 9.7 Failure of PaymentIf the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 Substantial Completion§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use


Init.

/


32

may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

.1 Except with the consent of the Owner, the Architect will perform no more than three (3) site reviews to determine whether the Work or a designated portion thereof has attained Final Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for any additional site reviews.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’ warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;


Init.

/


33

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

§ 9.11 The Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety, if any, shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner the sums stipulated as liquidated damages in the Contract Documents for each calendar day of delay after the date established for Substantial Completion in the Contract Documents until the Work is substantially complete.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.1 Safety Precautions and ProgramsThe Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

.4 If this Contract involves renovation, repair, or preparation of surfaces for painting in pre-1978 apartments, houses, or spaces used by child care facilities, Contractor shall use certified workers who follow the lead-safe work practices as required by the US Environmental Protection Agency’s Renovation, Repair and Remodeling rule described in 40 CFR § 745.85. Notification of the tenants or users under this rule will be the responsibility of the Owner.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.


Init.

/


34

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or PropertyIf either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to exclusive of attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. This indemnification obligation shall not apply to any claim for which Owner would not be liable under the Maine Tort Claims Act (14 M.R.S.A. ’8101, et seq.) if such claim were made directly against Owner and Owner shall continue to enjoy all rights, claims, immunities and defenses available to it under law.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence.


Init.

/


35

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.incurred, exclusive of attorneys’ fees.

§ 10.4 EmergenciesIn an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS§ 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect’s consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor’s commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

§ 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.

§ 11.2 Owner’s Insurance§ 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto.

§ 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner’s Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance


Init.

/


36

required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance.

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation§ 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property.

§ 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.

§ 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion InsuranceThe Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner’s property, due to fire or other hazards however caused.caused, with the exception of intentional acts or grossly negligent consultants, contractors or sub-contractors.

§11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss§ 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 30 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work.


Init.

/


37

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK§ 12.1 Uncovering of Work§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2 Correction of Work§ 12.2.1 Before Substantial CompletionThe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.


Init.

/


38

§ 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming WorkIf the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS§ 13.1 Governing LawThe Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction’s choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4.

§ 13.2 Successors and Assigns§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment.

§ 13.3 Rights and Remedies§ 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing.

§ 13.4 Tests and Inspections§ 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require.

§ 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.

§ 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.


Init.

/


39

§ 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.5 InterestPayments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT§ 14.1 Termination by the Contractor§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;


Init.

/


40

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;

and.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,

terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement.Agreement; but not including overhead and profit on Work not executed.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES§ 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 DefinitionA Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.2 Time Limits on ClaimsThe Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.


Init.

/


41

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims§ 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

§ 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance§ 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker’s decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.5 Claims for Additional CostIf the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

§ 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time§ 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.

§ 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

§ 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential DamagesThe Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 Initial Decision§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand


Init.

/


42

mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 Mediation§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties


Init.

/


43

or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 Arbitration§ 15.4.1 If the The parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim this Agreement, any claim, dispute or other matter in question arising out of or related to this Agreement subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, arbitration, which unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another place is mutually agreed upon, and in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. this Agreement, except that the parties shall select only one Arbitrator, and there shall be no discovery. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, this Agreement, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.defended.

§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.

§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.

§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 73 00.11 – 1 Schedule of Liquidated Damages

SECTION 00 73 00.11 SCHEDULE OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

SAMPLE Liquidated damages (a fixed amount set forth in the Contract) agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor are intended to compensate the Owner for unexcused delay in the performance of the Contract. The parties agree that the purpose of the liquidated damages schedule below is to establish, in advance, a reasonable estimate of the damages that would be incurred by the Owner if there is an unexcused delay, or a breach of Contract, which causes the work to be extended beyond the contractual substantial completion date. This agreement of liquidated damages by the parties is made to establish the reasonableness of them to the actual damages an Owner may have incurred due to unexcused delays by the Contractor, even though the actual damages may be an uncertain amount and unprovable. The specific per diem rates of Liquidated Damages are ( /[enter amt if can reasonably determine-provide method of determination; otherwise] set forth below). By executing the Contract, the Contractor acknowledges that such an amount is not a penalty and that the daily amount set forth in the Contract is a reasonable per diem forecast of damages incurred by the Owner due to the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Original Contract Amount Per Diem Amount From To of Liquidated Damages More Than and Including 0 $100,000 $500 $100,000 $300,000 $675 $300,000 $500,000 $750 $500,000 $1,000,000 $825 $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $1,000 $2,000,000 $4,000,000 $1,250 $4,000,000 and more $1,500


Document A101®

– 2017 Exhibit AInsurance and Bonds

Init.

/

AIA Document A101® – 2017 Exhibit A. Copyright © 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A101," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:51:42 ET on 06/17/2021 under Order No.2908190133 which expires on 07/02/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail [email protected] Notes: (1467185228)

1

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

This document is intended to be used in conjunction with AIA Document A201®–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Article 11 of A201®–2017 contains additional insurance provisions.

This Insurance and Bonds Exhibit is part of the Agreement, between the Owner and the Contractor, dated the N/A day of in the year Sample(In words, indicate day, month and year.)

for the following PROJECT:(Name and location or address)

THE OWNER:(Name, legal status and address)

University of Maine Systemby and through University of Maine5765 Service BuildingOrono, ME 04469

THE CONTRACTOR:(Name, legal status and address)

TABLE OF ARTICLES

A.1 GENERAL

A.2 OWNER’S INSURANCE

A.3 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AND BONDS

A.4 SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

ARTICLE A.1 GENERALThe Owner and Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance, and provide bonds, as set forth in this Exhibit. As used in this Exhibit, the term General Conditions refers to AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

ARTICLE A.2 OWNER’S INSURANCE§ A.2.1 GeneralPrior to commencement of the Work, the Owner shall secure the insurance, and provideevidence of the coverage, required under this Article A.2 and, upon the Contractor’s request,provide a copy of the property insurance policy or policies required by Section A.2.3. Thecopy of the policy or policies provided shall contain all applicable conditions, definitions,exclusions, and endorsements.

00 73 16SAMPLE

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 73 16 - 1 A101 Ex. A - Insurance & Bonds

Init.

/


2

§ A.2.2 Liability InsuranceThe Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual general liability insurance.

§ A.2.3 Required Property Insurance§ A.2.3.1 Unless this obligation is placed on the Contractor pursuant to Section A.3.3.2.1, the Owner shall purchaseand maintain, from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk "all-risks" completed value or equivalent policy form and sufficient to cover the total value of the entire Project on a replacement cost basis. The Owner’s property insurance coverage shall be no less than the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus the value of subsequent Modifications and labor performed and materials or equipment supplied by others. The property insurance shall be maintained until Substantial Completion and thereafter as provided in Section A.2.3.1.3, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by the parties to this Agreement. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors in the Project as insureds. This insurance shall include the interests of mortgagees as loss payees.

§ A.2.3.1.1 Causes of Loss. The insurance required by this Section A.2.3.1 shall provide coverage for direct physicalloss or damage, and shall not exclude the risks of fire, explosion, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, or windstorm. The insurance shall also provide coverage for ensuing loss or resulting damage from error, omission, or deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship, or materials. Sub-limits, if any, are as follows:(Indicate below the cause of loss and any applicable sub-limit.)§ A.2.3.1 For this project, Property Insurance coverage, up to the total amount of the Project, will be provided by theUniversity by either adding the Project to the University’s existing master property insurance or purchasing a stand-alone builder’s risk policy. Coverage shall be included for the Contractor and all Subcontractors, as their interests may appear, while involved in the Project and until the work is completed or the contractor is otherwise advised in writing. This insurance is limited to the "all risk" type coverage provided under the University’s master property insurance for direct physical loss or damage to the building or building materials related to the project, subject to standard policy limitations and exclusions. The contractor is responsible for a $10,000 per claim deductible. Any other insurance desired by the Contractor beyond that covered by the University’s insurance, or to cover the $10,000 deductible, is the responsibility of the Contractor. This contract stands as verification of the University’s property insurance coverage on the project and no further verification will be provided.

Causes of Loss Sub-Limit

§ A.2.3.1.2 Specific Required Coverages. The insurance required by this Section A.2.3.1 shall provide coverage for lossor damage to falsework and other temporary structures, and to building systems from testing and startup. The insurance shall also cover debris removal, including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and reasonable compensation for the Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss, including claim preparation expenses. Sub-limits, if any, are as follows:(Indicate below type of coverage and any applicable sub-limit for specific required coverages.)

Coverage Sub-Limit

§ A.2.3.1.3 Unless the parties agree otherwise, upon Substantial Completion, the Owner shall continue the insurancerequired by Section A.2.3.1 or, if necessary, replace the insurance policy required under Section A.2.3.1 with property insurance written for the total value of the Project that shall remain in effect until expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 of the General Conditions.

§ A.2.3.1.4 Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions. If the insurance required by this Section A.2.3 is subject todeductibles or self-insured retentions, the Owner shall be responsible for all loss not covered because of such deductibles or retentions.

§ A.2.3.2 Occupancy or Use Prior to Substantial Completion. The Owner’s occupancy or use of any completed orpartially completed portion of the Work prior to Substantial Completion shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing the insurance under Section A.2.3.1 have consented in writing to the continuance of


Init.

/


3

coverage. The Owner and the Contractor shall take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse, or reduction of insurance, unless they agree otherwise in writing.

§ A.2.3.3 Insurance for Existing StructuresIf the Work involves remodeling an existing structure or constructing an addition to an existing structure, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work as set forth in Section 12.2.2 of the General Conditions, "all-risks" property insurance, on a replacement cost basis, protecting the existing structure against direct physical loss or damage from the causes of loss identified in Section A.2.3.1, notwithstanding the undertaking of the Work. The Owner shall be responsible for all co-insurance penalties.

§ A.2.4 Optional Extended Property Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain the insurance selected and described below.(Select the types of insurance the Owner is required to purchase and maintain by placing an X in the box(es) next to the description(s) of selected insurance. For each type of insurance selected, indicate applicable limits of coverage or other conditions in the fill point below the selected item.)

[ ] § A.2.4.1 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance, to reimburse the Owner for loss of use of the Owner’s property, or the inability to conduct normal operations due to a covered cause of loss.

[ ] § A.2.4.2 Ordinance or Law Insurance, for the reasonable and necessary costs to satisfy the minimum requirements of the enforcement of any law or ordinance regulating the demolition, construction, repair, replacement or use of the Project.

[ ] § A.2.4.3 Expediting Cost Insurance, for the reasonable and necessary costs for the temporary repair of damage to insured property, and to expedite the permanent repair or replacement of the damaged property.

[ ] § A.2.4.4 Extra Expense Insurance, to provide reimbursement of the reasonable and necessary excess costs incurred during the period of restoration or repair of the damaged property that are over and above the total costs that would normally have been incurred during the same period of time had no loss or damage occurred.

[ ] § A.2.4.5 Civil Authority Insurance, for losses or costs arising from an order of a civil authority prohibiting access to the Project, provided such order is the direct result of physical damage covered under the required property insurance.

[ ] § A.2.4.6 Ingress/Egress Insurance, for loss due to the necessary interruption of the insured’s business due to physical prevention of ingress to, or egress from, the Project as a direct result of physical damage.

[ ] § A.2.4.7 Soft Costs Insurance, to reimburse the Owner for costs due to the delay of completion of the Work, arising out of physical loss or damage covered by the required property insurance: including construction loan fees; leasing and marketing expenses; additional fees, including those of architects,


Init.

/


4

engineers, consultants, attorneys and accountants, needed for the completion of the construction, repairs, or reconstruction; and carrying costs such as property taxes, building permits, additional interest on loans, realty taxes, and insurance premiums over and above normal expenses.

§ A.2.5 Other Optional Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain the insurance selected below.(Select the types of insurance the Owner is required to purchase and maintain by placing an X in the box(es) next to the description(s) of selected insurance.)

[ ] § A.2.5.1 Cyber Security Insurance for loss to the Owner due to data security and privacy breach, including costs of investigating a potential or actual breach of confidential or private information.(Indicate applicable limits of coverage or other conditions in the fill point below.)

[ ] § A.2.5.2 Other Insurance(List below any other insurance coverage to be provided by the Owner and any applicable limits.)

Coverage Limits

ARTICLE A.3 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AND BONDS§ A.3.1 General§ A.3.1.1 Certificates of Insurance. The Contractor shall provide certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner evidencing compliance with the requirements in this Article A.3 at the following times: (1) prior to commencement of the Work; (2) upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance; and (3) upon the Owner’s written request. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of commercial liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the periods required by Section A.3.2.1 and Section A.3.3.1. The certificates will show the Owner as an additional insured on the Contractor’s Commercial General Liability and excess or umbrella liability policy or policies.

§ A.3.1.1.1 Certificates of Insurance filed with the University of Maine System shall indicate the Certificate Holder as:

University of Maine SystemOffice of Risk ManagementRobinson Hall46 University DriveAugusta, ME 04330

§ A.3.1.2 Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions. The Contractor shall disclose to the Owner any deductible or self- insured retentions applicable to any insurance required to be provided by the Contractor.

§ A.3.1.3 Additional Insured Obligations. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall cause the commercial general liability coverage to include (1) the Owner, the Architect, and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions for which loss occurs during completed operations. The additional insured coverage shall be primary and non-contributory to any of the Owner’s general liability insurance policies and shall apply to both ongoing and completed operations. To the extent commercially available, the additional insured coverage shall be no less than that provided by Insurance Services Office, Inc. (ISO) forms CG 20 10 07 04, CG 20 37 07 04, and, with respect to the Architect and the Architect’s consultants, CG 20 32 07 04. All required insurance shall be provided by companies that have a current A.M. Best insurance rating of A- or better and that are licensed or approved to do business in the State of Maine.


Init.

/


5

§ A.3.2 Contractor’s Required Insurance Coverage§ A.3.2.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the following types and limits of insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall maintain the required insurance until the expiration of the period for correction of Work as set forth in Section 12.2.2 of the General Conditions, unless a different duration is stated below:(If the Contractor is required to maintain insurance for a duration other than the expiration of the period for correction of Work, state the duration.)

§ A.3.2.2 Commercial General Liability§ A.3.2.2.1 Commercial General Liability insurance for the Project written on an occurrence form with policy limits of not less than two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) each occurrence, two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) general aggregate, and two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) aggregate for products-completed operations hazard, providing coverage for claims including

.1 damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, including occupational sickness or disease, and death of any person;

.2 personal injury and advertising injury;

.3 damages because of physical damage to or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use of such property;

.4 bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and

.5 the Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Section 3.18 of the General Conditions.

§ A.3.2.2.2 The Contractor’s Commercial General Liability policy under this Section A.3.2.2 shall not contain an exclusion or restriction of coverage for the following:

.1 Claims by one insured against another insured, if the exclusion or restriction is based solely on the fact that the claimant is an insured, and there would otherwise be coverage for the claim.

.2 Claims for property damage to the Contractor’s Work arising out of the products-completed operations hazard where the damaged Work or the Work out of which the damage arises was performed by a Subcontractor.

.3 Claims for bodily injury other than to employees of the insured.

.4 Claims for indemnity under Section 3.18 of the General Conditions arising out of injury to employees of the insured.

.5 Claims or loss excluded under a prior work endorsement or other similar exclusionary language.

.6 Claims or loss due to physical damage under a prior injury endorsement or similar exclusionary language.

.7 Claims related to residential, multi-family, or other habitational projects, if the Work is to be performed on such a project.

.8 Claims related to roofing, if the Work involves roofing.

.9 Claims related to exterior insulation finish systems (EIFS), synthetic stucco or similar exterior coatings or surfaces, if the Work involves such coatings or surfaces.

.10 Claims related to earth subsidence or movement, where the Work involves such hazards.

.11 Claims related to explosion, collapse and underground hazards, where the Work involves such hazards.

§ A.3.2.3 Automobile Liability covering vehicles owned, and non-owned vehicles used, by the Contractor, with policy limits of not less than one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) per accident, for bodily injury, death of any person, and property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance and use of those motor vehicles along with any other statutorily required automobile coverage.

§ A.3.2.4 The Contractor may achieve the required limits and coverage for Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability through a combination of primary and excess or umbrella liability insurance, provided such primary and excess or umbrella insurance policies result in the same or greater coverage as the coverages required under Section A.3.2.2 and A.3.2.3, and in no event shall any excess or umbrella liability insurance provide narrower coverage than the primary policy. The excess policy shall not require the exhaustion of the underlying limits only through the actual payment by the underlying insurers.


Init.

/


6

§ A.3.2.5 Workers’ Compensation at statutory limits.

§ A.3.2.6 Employers’ Liability with policy limits not less than five hundred thousand dollars ($ 500,000 ) each accident, five hundred thousand dollars ($ 500,000 ) each employee, and five hundred thousand dollars ($ 500,000 ) policy limit.

§ A.3.2.7 Jones Act, and the Longshore & Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, as required, if the Work involves hazards arising from work on or near navigable waterways, including vessels and docks docks. Policy limits for such coverage shall not be less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) each accident, five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) each employee, and five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) policy limit. Contractor is required to provide proof of such coverage, if applicable to the Work, by submitting a copy of the endorsement or by submitting the USLH form WC 00 01 06 A (current edition).

§ A.3.2.8 If the Contractor is required to furnish professional services as part of the Work, the Contractor shall procure Professional Liability insurance covering performance of the professional services, with policy limits of not less than one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) per claim and one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) in the aggregate.

§ A.3.2.9 If the Work involves the transport, dissemination, use, or release of pollutants, the Contractor shall procure Pollution Liability insurance, with policy limits of not less than one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) per claim and two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) in the aggregate.

§ A.3.2.10 Coverage under Sections A.3.2.8 and A.3.2.9 may be procured through a Combined Professional Liability and Pollution Liability insurance policy, with combined policy limits of not less than one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) per claim and two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) in the aggregate.

§ A.3.2.11 Insurance for maritime liability risks associated with the operation of a vessel, if the Work requires such activities, with policy limits of not less than two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) per claim and two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) in the aggregate.

§ A.3.2.12 Insurance for the use or operation of manned or unmanned aircraft, if the Work requires such activities, with policy limits of not less than one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) per claim and one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) in the aggregate. Authorization from Administration of the University of Maine System must be obtained thirty (30) days prior to the utilization of the equipment.

§ A.3.3 Contractor’s Other Insurance Coverage§ A.3.3.1 Insurance selected and described in this Section A.3.3 shall be purchased from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall maintain the required insurance until the expiration of the period for correction of Work as set forth in Section 12.2.2 of the General Conditions, unless a different duration is stated below:(If the Contractor is required to maintain any of the types of insurance selected below for a duration other than the expiration of the period for correction of Work, state the duration.)

N/A

§ A.3.3.2 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the following types and limits of insurance in accordance with Section A.3.3.1.(Select the types of insurance the Contractor is required to purchase and maintain by placing an X in the box(es) next to the description(s) of selected insurance. Where policy limits are provided, include the policy limit in the appropriate fill point.)

[ ] § A.3.3.2.1 Property insurance of the same type and scope satisfying the requirements identified in Section A.2.3, which, if selected in this section A.3.3.2.1, relieves the Owner of the responsibility to purchase and maintain such insurance except insurance required by Section A.2.3.1.3 and Section A.2.3.3. insurance. The Contractor shall comply with all obligations of the Owner under Section A.2.3 except to the extent provided below. The Contractor shall disclose to the Owner the amount of any


Init.

/


7

deductible, and the Owner shall be responsible for losses within the deductible. Upon request, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy of the property insurance policy or policies required. The Owner shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurer and be the trustee of the proceeds of the property insurance in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions unless otherwise set forth below:(Where the Contractor’s obligation to provide property insurance differs from the Owner’s obligations as described under Section A.2.3, indicate such differences in the space below. Additionally, if a party other than the Owner will be responsible for adjusting and settling a loss with the insurer and acting as the trustee of the proceeds of property insurance in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions, indicate the responsible party below.)

[ ] § A.3.3.2.2 Railroad Protective Liability Insurance, with policy limits of not less than ($ ) per claim and ($ ) in the aggregate, for Work within fifty (50) feet of railroad property.

[ ] § A.3.3.2.3 Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance, with policy limits of not less than one million dollars ($ 1,000,000 ) per claim and two million dollars ($ 2,000,000 ) in the aggregate, for liability arising from the encapsulation, removal, handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of asbestos-containing materials.

[ ] § A.3.3.2.4 Insurance for physical damage to property while it is in storage and in transit to the construction site on an "all-risks" completed value form.

[ ] § A.3.3.2.5 Property insurance on an "all-risks" completed value form, covering property owned by the Contractor and used on the Project, including scaffolding and other equipment.

[ ] § A.3.3.2.6 Other Insurance(List below any other insurance coverage to be provided by the Contractor and any applicable limits.)

Coverage Limits

§ A.3.4 Performance Bond and Payment BondThe Contractor shall provide surety bonds, from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located, as follows:and the Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereof. Bonds may be obtained through the Contractor’s usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The amount of each bond shall be equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. Should the Contract Sum change during the contract and warranty periods, the amount of the Bonds will be changed to reflect the Contract Sum.

.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner at the same time as the signed Contract Agreement is delivered to the Owner. Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall submit satisfactory evidence that such bonds will be furnished.

(Specify type and penal sum of bonds.).2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the

surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.Type Penal Sum ($0.00)

Payment Bond

Performance Bond

Payment and Performance Bonds shall be AIA Document A312™, Payment Bond and Performance Bond, or contain provisions identical to AIA Document A312™, current as of the date of this Agreement..3

The Contract Bonds shall continue in effect for one year after final acceptance of each contract to protect the Owner’s interest in connection with the one year guarantee of workmanship and materials


Init.

/


8

and to assure settlement of claims, for the payment of all bills for labor, materials, and equipment by the Contractor.

ARTICLE A.4 SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONSSpecial terms and conditions that modify this Insurance and Bonds Exhibit, if any, are as follows:

N/A


State of Maine

Department of Labor

Bureau of Labor Standards

Augusta, Maine 04333-0045

Telephone (207) 623-7906

Wage Determination - In accordance with 26 MRS §1301 et. seq., this is a determination by the Bureau of Labor

Standards, of the fair minimum wage rate to be paid to laborers and workers employed on the below titled project.

2021 Fair Minimum Wage Rates

Building 2 Penobscot County

(other than 1 or 2 family homes)

Occupation Title Minimum

Wage Minimum

Benefit Total Occupation TitleMinimum

Wage Minimum

Benefit Total Asbestos/Lead Removal Worker $ 16.75 $ 0.68 $ 17.43 Heating/Vent/AC $ 28.50 $ 3.84 $ 32.34 Assembler - Metal Building $ 18.75 $ 3.55 $ 22.30 Insulation Installer $ 21.00 $ 3.05 $ 24.05 Backhoe Loader Operator $ 29.83 $ 12.87 $ 42.70 Ironworker - Reinforcing $ 19.00 $ 5.63 $ 24.63 Boom Truck (Truck Crane) Operator $ 25.00 $ 5.86 $ 30.86 Ironworker - Structural $ 25.50 $ 6.48 $ 31.98 Bricklayer $ 27.44 $ 4.45 $ 31.89 Laborer - Skilled $ 18.00 $ 4.74 $ 22.74 Bulldozer Operator $ 22.00 $ 3.37 $ 25.37 Laborers (Helpers & Tenders) $ 16.50 $ 1.05 $ 17.55 Carpenter $ 22.75 $ 4.30 $ 27.05 Line Erector - Power/Cable Splicer $ 32.89 $ 6.55 $ 39.44 Carpenter - Acoustical $ 20.00 $ 18.82 $ 38.82 Loader Operator - Front-End $ 20.00 $ 2.97 $ 22.97 Carpenter - Rough $ 20.00 $ 4.39 $ 24.39 Mechanic- Maintenance $ 32.50 $ 2.92 $ 35.42 Cement Mason/Finisher $ 19.63 $ 4.14 $ 23.77 Mechanic- Refrigeration $ 26.71 $ 7.02 $ 33.73 Communication Equip Installer $ 26.56 $ 14.80 $ 41.36 Millwright $ 22.00 $ 1.96 $ 23.96 Concrete Pump Operator $ 20.50 $ 0.00 $ 20.50 Oil/Fuel Burner Servicer/Installer $ 25.20 $ 5.40 $ 30.60 Crane Operator =>15 Tons) $ 29.00 $ 6.68 $ 35.68 Painter $ 16.75 $ 2.12 $ 18.87 Crusher Plant Operator $ 20.00 $ 2.90 $ 22.90 Pipe/Steam/Sprinkler Fitter $ 24.63 $ 5.22 $ 29.85 Dry-Wall Applicator $ 25.00 $ 0.90 $ 25.90 Plumber (Licensed) $ 29.25 $ 4.03 $ 33.28 Dry-Wall Taper & Finisher $ 24.50 $ 2.27 $ 26.77 Plumber Helper/Trainee $ 19.50 $ 2.51 $ 22.01 Earth Auger Operator $ 26.96 $ 5.55 $ 32.51 Propane & Natural Gas Serv/Inst $ 28.00 $ 4.66 $ 32.66 Electrician - Licensed $ 30.68 $ 14.80 $ 45.48 Roofer $ 23.13 $ 0.00 $ 23.13 Electrician Helper/Cable Puller $ 18.00 $ 1.96 $ 19.96 Sheet Metal Worker $ 20.00 $ 5.50 $ 25.50 Elevator Constructor/Installer $ 61.25 $ 39.21 $ 100.46 Sider $ 17.50 $ 4.28 $ 21.78 Excavator Operator $ 22.00 $ 1.85 $ 23.85 Tile Setter $ 23.00 $ 3.58 $ 26.58 Fence Setter $ 20.00 $ 6.61 $ 26.61 Truck Driver - Heavy $ 18.00 $ 0.66 $ 18.66 Floor Layer $ 23.00 $ 5.39 $ 28.39 Truck Driver - Light $ 17.00 $ 0.52 $ 17.52 Furniture Installer/Assembler $ 16.00 $ 2.52 $ 18.52 Truck Driver - Medium $ 20.95 $ 2.02 $ 22.97 Glazier $ 19.75 $ 4.70 $ 24.45 Truck Driver - Tractor Trailer $ 20.00 $ 0.72 $ 20.72

The Laborer classifications include a wide range of work duties. Therefore, if any specific occupation to be employed on this project is not listed in this determination, call the Bureau of Labor Standards at the above number for further clarification.

Welders are classified in the trade to which the welding is incidental.

Apprentices – The minimum wage rate for registered apprentices are those set forth in the standards and policies of the Maine State Apprenticeship and Training Council for approved apprenticeship programs.

Title 26 §1310 requires that a clearly legible statement of all fair minimum wage and benefits rates to be paid the several classes of laborers, workers and mechanics employed on the construction on the public work must be kept posted in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site by each contractor and subcontractor subject to sections 1304 to 1313.

Appeal – Any person affected by the determination of these rates may appeal to the Commissioner of Labor by filing a written notice with the Commissioner stating the specific grounds of the objection within ten (10) days from the filing of these rates.

A true copy

Attest: Scott R. Cotnoir Wage & Hour Director Bureau of Labor Standards

Expiration Date: 12-31-2021

Revised 2-25-2021


00 73 46

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 00 73 46 - 1 Wage Determination

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 10 00 - 1 Summary

SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Future work. 7. Purchase contracts. 8. Owner-furnished products. 9. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 10. Access to site. 11. Coordination with occupants. 12. Work restrictions. 13. Specification and Drawing conventions. 14. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.03 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: DP Corbett HVAC Renovation.

1. Project Location: Flagstaff Rd., Orono, Maine 04469.

B. Owner: University of Maine System

1. Owner's Representative: Joshua Young, 207-581-2639.

C. Architect: WBRC Architects Engineers.

D. Web-Based Project Software: Project software administered by Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using web-based Project software.


1.04 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The Project consists of the removal of abandoned roof mounted refrigerant fluid coolers, exterior fluid cooler, indoor water chillers and modular air handlers to make way for the installation of a new exterior air-cooled scroll chiller on existing concrete pad with interior remote evaporator, and new modular indoor air handlers. As part of the installation, existing electrical power shall be removed and new conductors, conduit, breakers, and disconnects shall be installed. Existing underground refrigerant piping between exterior fluid cooler and indoor chiller is expected to be reused. Project shall include removal of pneumatic controls serving systems mentioned above and convert all new equipment and systems to DDC controls visible from the existing Steam Plant headend and other periphery Work indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.05 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated in these Specifications and in the Drawings. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, students and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.06 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.


1.07 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 3:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: Allowed as needed with Owner approval. 2. Early Morning Hours: Allowed as needed with Owner approval. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner prior to execution. 4. Hours for Core Drilling and Similar Noisy Work: Coordinate with Owner prior to execution.

C. Existing Chilled Water System Interruptions:

1. Coordinate chilled water system shutdown schedule with Owner. 2. Owner to provide temporary cooling equipment for areas served by computer room air

conditioners connected to the chilled water system. 3. System shall be taken offline after air handler removals (dependent on weather, to be coordinated

during pre-construction meeting). 4. Chilled water plant shall be completed after air handler assembly and operation for temporary

ventilation (dependent on weather, to be coordinated during pre-construction meeting).

D. Existing Air Handling System Interruptions: Air handling equipment shall be available to be taken offline on April 15th, to be coordinated with the Owner.

1. Equipment shall not be taken off-line until replacement equipment is on-site. 2. Immediately after taking air handling systems offline, construct temporary ventilation system as

shown in the drawings. 3. New air handlers shall be constructed with ventilation and fan operation under manual control

within 4 weeks. Once air handlers are constructed, temporary ventilation fan can be removed. 4. If air handlers must be taken offline for remainder of work, coordinate with Owner the duration

and time units will be offline. Units shall not be offline for more than 4 hours at a time. 5. Air handling systems shall be fully operational (ventilation, heating, cooling and fans) under

manual control within 6 weeks. 6. Air handling systems shall be fully operation under automatic DDC system control per the

sequence of operation within 8 weeks.

E. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

F. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

G. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco, marijuana or e-cigarette products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

H. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.


I. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.08 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 14 00 Work Restrictions

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Tobacco Free Campus Policy: On January 1, 2011 the University System adopted a tobacco free

campus policy. As of January 1, 2012 compliance with the tobacco free campus policy became mandatory. This paragraph serves as notification to Contractor of the policy and provides the parameters of compliance enforcement. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying its workers and subcontractors regarding the policy and for enforcement of the policy with same. Noncompliance will be managed as follows:

1. First offense – notify Contractor to remind employee and/or subcontractor of policy. 2. Second offense – contractor/subcontractor employee removed from campus for the remainder

of the Work. Additional information regarding the tobacco free campus policy is located at:

http://umaine.edu/tobaccofree/ B. Sexual Harassment will not be tolerated on the campuses of the University of Maine System. C. Weapons and Ammunition are not permitted on the campuses of the University of Maine System. D. Contractor will be required to provide a site-specific Safety Plan for the project. E. Contractor parking will be limited to authorized areas defined by the University of Maine System

Representative. PART 2 to 3 – Not Used


http://umaine.edu/tobaccofree/

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 21 00 - 1 Allowances

SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

2. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for field testing by an independent testing agency.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Allowance: A quantity of work or dollar amount included in the Contract, established in lieu of additional requirements, used to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

1.4 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection, or purchase and delivery, of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed by the Owner to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances in the form specified for Change Orders.


1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, required maintenance materials, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs

and other markups. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of Work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to

unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity

survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs due to a change in the scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of Work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No.1: Lump-Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $5,000.00 for repairing damaged insulation, installing missing insulation, and complete jacketing on existing interior refrigerant piping, as specified in Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

1. This allowance includes material, receiving, handling, and installation costs, and Contractor overhead and profit.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 25 00 - 1 Substitution Procedures

SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as

applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.


f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as

well as names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.06 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.


h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been

coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.




SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Project: Substitution Request Number: To: From: Re: Date: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Trade Name: Model No. Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, and performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request: applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitutions will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies: 1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified

product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product. 3. Will provide no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete

with no additional cost to Owner. 5. Waive claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 6. Will reimburse Owner and Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with substitution. Submitted By: Signed By: Firm: Address: Telephone: Fax: A/E’s REVIEW AND ACTION Submission approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 0. Submission approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 0. Submission rejected - Use specified materials. Submission request received too late - Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports

Other If reference to a special warranty form was added where a single warranty must cover work by several contractors, insert form here and delete "Not Used" above.

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 26 00 - 1 Contract Modification Procedures

SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710 form included in Project Manual.

1.04 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 26 00 - 2 Contract Modification Procedures

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.05 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.06 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Work Change Directive on EJCDC Document C-940 form included in Project Manual. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.




UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 29 00 - 1 Payment Procedures

SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances.

2. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Division. Further breakdown divisions with the majority of work to include materials, labor and subcontractors scope as separate line items.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Owner's name. c. Owner's Project number. d. Name of Architect. e. Architect's Project number. f. Contractor's name and address. g. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.


3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

7. Overhead Costs, Separate Line Items: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items.

8. Temporary Facilities: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items.

9. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

10. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments, as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Owner/Contractor Agreement. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment schedule to be reoccurring monthly at an agreed upon date by Architect, Owner, and Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.


1. Other Application for Payment forms proposed by the Contractor may be acceptable to Architect and Owner. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every

entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values.


3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Sustainable design action plans, including preliminary project materials cost data. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the

Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

a. Complete administrative actions, submittals, and Work preceding this application, as described in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Certification of completion of final punch list items. 3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,

fees, and similar obligations were paid. 4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 5. AIA Document G706. 6. AIA Document G706A. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of

Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 10. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations are paid. 11. Waivers and releases.




UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 31 00 - 1 Project Management and Coordination

SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.


1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, in web-based Project software directory, and in prominent location in each built facility. Keep list current at all times.

1.05 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.06 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.


10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. h. RFIs which do not provide a recommended solution.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log monthly. Use software log that is part of web-based Project software. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal

Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.


1.07 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. Use Architect's Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions:

1. Meeting minutes. 2. Contract modifications forms and logs. 3. RFI forms and logs. 4. Photo documentation. 5. Submittals forms and logs. 6. Payment application forms.

B. On completion of Project, provide one (1) complete archive copy(ies) of Project Web site files to Owner and to Architect in a digital storage format acceptable to Architect.

C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a

digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.

1.08 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Use of web-based Project software. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents.


m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises and existing building. p. Work restrictions. q. Working hours. r. Owner's occupancy requirements. s. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. t. Procedures for moisture and mold control. u. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. v. Construction waste management and recycling. w. Parking availability. x. Office, work, and storage areas. y. Equipment deliveries and priorities. z. First aid. aa. Security. bb. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.


5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site use. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of Proposal Requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.




UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 33 00 - 1 Submittal Procedures

SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.


1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination drawings and subcontract list and for requirements for web-based Project software.

3. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

4. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports, and schedule of tests and inspections.

5. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals.

6. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

7. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

8. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections


or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal Category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled date of fabrication. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Construction Manager. 5. Name of Contractor. 6. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 7. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 8. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section number with

sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 9. Category and type of submittal. 10. Submittal purpose and description. 11. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of

multiple items. 12. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 13. Indication of full or partial submittal. 14. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 15. Other necessary identification. 16. Remarks. 17. Signature of transmitter.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.


D. Paper Submittals:

1. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification; include name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

5. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

6. Transmittal for Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using AIA Document G810.

E. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.

F. Submittals for Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files, or other format indicated by Project software website.

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements for Projects Processed as Electronic Submittals: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals for all submittals, including but not limited to, product data, shop drawings, samples, closeout submittals (i.e., O&M Manuals, Warranties, Record Drawings, etc.).

2. Submit electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to the Architects Software specifically established for the Project. A brief tutorial handout will be provided at the preconstruction meeting.

a. Submit data/drawings/etc for only one (1) Specification Section per submittal. b. Do not combine action and informational items in the same submittal. c. Informational submittals shall be clearly marked with “INFO-” at the beginning of the

subject line. Architect will not return informational submittals that are in compliance. d. Each submittal shall be a single PDF file with portrait and/or landscape orientation applied

correctly, that includes the following: 1) A GC Transmittal Letter with details of the submittal item, including Specification

Section number, type and description of what is being submitted – for example: 061753 Drawings - Wood Trusses.

2) Include in the pdf file a cover sheet with the GC review stamp leaving sufficient space for the Architect’s review stamp.

3) Data, drawings, etc., that relate to the submittal item. 4) Black or red marks (arrows, circles, bubbles) to indicate specific product

information as applicable. e. Electronic submittals are required for all documents (i.e. large format drawings and

samples, etc.), unless noted otherwise. 1) If hard copies of large format drawings are required, refer to individual

Specification Sections for details and Paragraph 2.1.A.3. 2) Samples: Hard copies are required for all samples, refer to Paragraph 2.1.A.2.e. For

electronic copy instructions, refer to Paragraph 2.1.D.

3. If HARD COPY submittals are requested use the same guidelines as in Paragraph 1.6.


B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.


4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

a. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Email Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal.

5. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information indicated. 6. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.


7. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

8. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record Sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.

G. Closeout Submittals: Submit closeout submittals in the following format:

1. Submit a PDF electronic file of all materials including but not limited to O&M Manuals, Warranties, Record Drawings, etc.) following the criteria outlined in Paragraph 1.6.

2. Submit one (1) hard copy of the same closeout O&M Manuals, Warranties, Record Drawings, etc., that was sent in the electronic copy.

3. Include the same cover sheet with the GC review stamp as was sent in the electronic copy.

H. Certificates:

1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.


2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

I. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use.

1.8 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the


responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

1.9 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp indication in web-based Project software. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval.

1.10 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it.

1. PDF Submittals: Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action.

2. Paper Submittals: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

3. Submittals by Web-Based Project Software: Architect will digitally stamp each submittal with an action stamp on Project software website, the appropriate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action.




UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 40 00 - 1 Quality Requirements

SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.


F. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

I. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect.

1.04 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

1.05 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.


C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.08 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality-control tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections.


E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.09 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,

if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.



A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.


3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

E. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

F. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection.

Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.


H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.02 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 42 00 - 1 References

SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.


1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.04 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org 9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.

http://www.aabc.com/

http://www.aamanet.org/

http://www.aapfco.org/

http://www.transportation.org/

http://www.aatcc.org/

http://www.americanbearings.org/

http://www.abma.com/

http://www.concrete.org/

http://www.concrete-pipe.org/

http://www.aeic.org/

http://www.afandpa.org/

http://www.aga.org/

http://www.aham.org/

http://www.ahrinet.org/

http://www.asphaltinstitute.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aisc.org/

http://www.steel.org/

http://www.aitc-glulam.org/

http://www.amca.org/

http://www.ansi.org/

http://www.aosaseed.com/

http://www.apawood.org/

http://www.archprecast.org/

http://www.api.org/

http://www.asphaltroofing.org/

http://www.asce.org/

http://www.ashrae.org/

http://www.asme.org/

http://www.asse.org/

http://www.asse-plumbing.org/

http://www.astm.org/

http://www.atis.org/

http://www.awea.org/

http://www.awinet.org/

http://www.awmac.com/

http://www.awpa.com/

http://www.aws.org/

http://www.awwa.org/


43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association);

www.bifma.org. 47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);

www.bissc.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CE - Conformite Europeenne; http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/ce-marking/ 51. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 52. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 53. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 54. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 55. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 56. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 57. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 58. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 59. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 60. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 61. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 62. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 63. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 64. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 65. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-

international.org. 66. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 67. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 68. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 69. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 70. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 71. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 72. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 73. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA). 74. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org. 75. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 76. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 77. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 78. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org . 79. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 80. ETL - Intertek (See Intertek); www.intertek.com. 81. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 82. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 83. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);

www.fiba.com. 84. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);

www.fivb.org. 85. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 86. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 87. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com. 88. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 89. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 90. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 91. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 92. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 93. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 94. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 95. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 96. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.

http://www.buildershardware.com/

http://www.gobrick.com/

http://www.bicsi.org/

http://www.bifma.org/

http://www.bissc.org/

http://www.bissc.org/

http://www.copper.org/

http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/ce-marking/

http://www.electricity.ca/

http://www.ce.org/

http://www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com/

http://www.cfsei.org/

http://www.cganet.com/

http://www.cellulose.org/

http://www.cisca.org/

http://www.cispi.org/

http://www.chainlinkinfo.org/

http://www.pbmdf.com/

http://www.carpet-rug.org/

http://www.coolroofs.org/

http://www.crsi.org/

http://www.csa.ca/

http://www.csa-international.org/

http://www.csa-international.org/

http://www.csinet.org/

http://www.cedarbureau.org/

http://www.cti.org/

http://www.dasma.com/

http://www.dhi.org/

http://www.eciaonline.org/

http://www.eima.com/

http://www.ejma.org/

http://www.esda.org/

http://www.intertek.com/

http://www.evo-world.org/

http://www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org/

http://www.fiba.com/

http://www.fivb.org/

http://www.fmglobal.com/

http://www.fmglobal.com/

http://www.floridaroof.com/

http://www.fluidsealing.com/

http://www.fscus.org/

http://www.gypsum.org/

http://www.glasswebsite.com/

http://www.greenseal.org/

http://www.pumps.org/

http://www.hpva.org/


97. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 98. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 99. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 100. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 101. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 102. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 103. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 104. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. 105. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 106. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 107. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 108. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North

America); www.ies.org. 109. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 110. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 111. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 112. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 113. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 114. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com. 115. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and

Automation Society); www.isa.org. 116. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 117. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface

Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 118. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 119. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 120. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 121. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 122. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 123. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 124. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 125. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 126. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 127. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 128. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 129. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 130. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 131. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 132. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-

hq.org. 133. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 134. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);

www.nace.org. 135. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 136. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 137. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 138. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 139. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 140. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 141. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 142. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 143. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 144. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 145. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 146. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 147. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 148. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 149. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 150. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.

http://www.hpwhite.com/

http://www.iapsc.org/

http://www.iasonline.org/

http://www.iccsafe.org/

http://www.icea.net/

http://www.icpa-hq.org/

http://www.icri.org/

http://www.iec.ch/

http://www.ieee.org/

http://www.ies.org/

http://www.iest.org/

http://www.igmaonline.org/

http://www.igshpa.okstate.edu/

http://www.iliai.com/

http://www.intertek.com/

http://www.isa.org/

http://www.isfanow.org/

http://www.iso.org/

http://www.itu.int/home

http://www.kcma.org/

http://www.lightning.org/

http://www.mbma.com/

http://www.metalconstruction.org./

http://www.maplefloor.org/

http://www.metalframingmfg.org/

http://www.mhia.org/

http://www.marble-institute.com/

http://www.wmmpa.com/

http://www.paintinfo.com/

http://www.mss-hq.org/

http://www.mss-hq.org/

http://www.naamm.org/

http://www.nace.org/

http://www.nadca.com/

http://www.naima.org/

http://www.nbgqa.com/

http://www.newbuildings.org/

http://www.ncaa.org/

http://www.ncma.org/

http://www.nebb.org/

http://www.necanet.org/

http://www.nelma.org/

http://www.nema.org/

http://www.netaworld.org/

http://www.nfhs.org/

http://www.nfpa.org/

http://www.nfrc.org/

http://www.nhla.com/


151. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 152. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 153. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 154. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 155. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 156. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. 157. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 158. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 159. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 160. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 161. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 162. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 163. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association);

http://www.plasa.org. 164. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 165. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 166. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 167. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 168. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 169. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 170. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 171. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 172. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 173. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 174. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 175. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 176. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;

www.smacna.org. 177. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 178. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 179. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 180. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 181. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 182. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 183. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 184. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 185. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 186. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 187. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 188. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 189. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 190. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA -

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 191. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 192. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 193. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 194. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 195. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 196. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; http://www.ul.com. 197. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 198. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 199. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 200. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 201. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 202. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 203. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 204. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 205. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 206. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 207. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

http://www.nlga.org/

http://www.nomma.org/

http://www.nrca.net/

http://www.nrmca.org/

http://www.nsf.org/

http://www.nspe.org/

http://www.nssga.org/

http://www.ntma.com/

http://www.nwfa.org/

http://www.pci.org/

http://www.pdionline.org/

http://www.plasa.org/

http://www.boltcouncil.org/

http://www.rfci.com/

http://www.redwoodinspection.com/

http://www.sae.org/

http://www.scte.org/

http://www.sdi.org/

http://www.steeldoor.org/

http://www.sefalabs.com/

http://www.siaonline.org/

http://www.steeljoist.org/

http://www.smainfo.org/

http://www.smacna.org/

http://www.smpte.org/

http://www.sprayfoam.org/

http://www.spib.org/

http://www.spri.org/

http://www.solar-rating.org/

http://www.ssina.com/

http://www.sspc.org/

http://www.steeltank.com/

http://www.steelwindows.com/

http://www.swpa.org/

http://www.tilt-up.org/

http://www.tileusa.com/

http://www.tema.org/

http://www.tiaonline.org/

http://www.masonrysociety.org/

http://www.tpinst.org/

http://www.turfgrasssod.org/

http://www.tileroofing.org/

http://www.ul.com/

http://www.uni-bell.org/

http://www.usavolleyball.org/

http://www.usgbc.org/

http://www.usitt.org/

http://www.wastec.org/

http://www.wclib.org/

http://www.wcmanet.org/

http://www.wdma.com/

http://www.wicnet.org/

http://www.wsrca.com/

http://www.wwpa.org/


C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division;

www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The

National Academies; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory;

www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide;

www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB).

http://www.din.de/

http://www.iapmo.org/

http://www.iccsafe.org/

http://www.icc-es.org/

http://www.usace.army.mil/

http://www.cpsc.gov/

http://www.nist.gov/

http://www.quicksearch.dla.mil/

http://www.energy.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.faa.gov/

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.hud.gov/

http://www.eetd.lbl.gov/

http://www.osha.gov/

http://www.state.gov/

http://www.trb.org/

http://www.ars.usda.gov/

http://www.usda.gov/

http://www.ojp.usdoj.gov/

http://www.usp.org/

http://www.usps.com/

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys



http://www.dsp.dla.mil/

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.wbdg.org/ccb

http://www.access-board.gov/


F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development;

www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.




http://www.bearhfti.ca.gov/

http://www.calregs.com/

http://www.cal-iaq.org/

http://www.cpuc.ca.gov/

http://www.aqmd.gov/

http://www.txforestservice.tamu.edu/

UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 50 00 - 1 Temporary Facilities and Controls

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.03 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their


operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.


2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72

deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with building occupants and performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.


E. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:

1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed. 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte.


3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM. 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista Business. 8. Productivity Software:

a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher. c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.

9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.

10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.

12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software providing daily backups.

3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

F. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car

and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.


G. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

C. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

E. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

G. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.

3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks

where openings are required. 6. Protect air-handling equipment. 7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.


H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of

fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project

site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.05 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing

the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

3.06 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.


E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 60 00 - 1 Product Requirements

SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 01 42 00 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.



A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following:

a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.


B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure

above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation

and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,

and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by

Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.07 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.


1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or

approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: …"

2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …"

3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated.

a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …"

4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements.

a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered.

a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …"

6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.


a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.02 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names

and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested.

B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.



UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 73 00 - 1 Execution

SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record

Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.

4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work.


A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.


1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

B. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease

of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 84 inches in

unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.


C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

1. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work.

3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."


F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.

Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.05 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.


2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work

area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" and Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.06 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."


3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 77 00 - 1 Closeout Procedures

SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and maintenance manual requirements.

2. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

3. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.


1.06 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel

of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and

systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.


2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.07 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion

inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.08 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.09 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.


C. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect or by uploading to web-based project software site.

D. Warranties in Paper Form:

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.


f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according

to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove

glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar

equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" and Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.02 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 78 23 - 1 Operation and Maintenance Data

SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field

conditions.

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect or by uploading to web-based project software site. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Submit three paper copies. Architect will return two copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.


D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

E. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

1.05 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.


1.06 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following:

1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

1.08 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.


B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.09 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:


1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification.

1.10 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.

C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.


a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.

1.11 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer


or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.




UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 78 39 - 1 Project Record Documents

SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

1.04 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.


c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,

redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use

in recording information.

a. See Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that

correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect.


e. Name of Contractor.

1.05 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

1.06 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

1.07 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 01 79 00 - 1 Demonstration and Training

SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For facilitator or instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit one copy within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label


information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared in same paper and PDF file format required for operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and

procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Architect.

1.07 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards.


d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Systems and equipment operation manuals. c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d. Product maintenance manuals. e. Project Record Documents. f. Identification systems. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.


d. Procedures for routine cleaning. e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

1.08 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

1.09 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage factory qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.


B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in full HD mode with vibration reduction technology.

1. Submit video recordings on labeled thumb drive. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to Project Manual table of

contents. Provide complete screen-based menu. 3. File Names: Utilize file names based on name of equipment generally described in video segment,

as identified in Project specifications. 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the

equipment demonstration and training recording that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project Manual table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. Email address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual

table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop

filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 02 41 19 - 1 Selective Demolition

SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected building elements.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.


1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified

in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly

dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and

to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.


2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials

and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey

debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and

Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 00 - 1 Common Work Results for HVAC

SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Painting and finishing. 9. Concrete bases. 10. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:


1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing

elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.


B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and

pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

4. Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.


P. Below Grade, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe

material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings

according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.


J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

B. All painting of exposed utilities in finished spaces by others. Refer to Division 9 Painting Sections. Coordinate with areas as indicated on the Mechanical drawings and Architectural Reflected Ceiling and Finish Plans.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Housekeeping pads furnished and installed by others. Refer to Division 3 Concrete. Coordinate sizes and locations of housekeeping pads based on approved equipment shop drawings and submittals.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.


3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 13 - 1 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.


C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 5. Grounding Rings: Motors 5 hp and larger controlled by variable frequency PWM drives shall be

factory fitted with grounding rings.

a. If motors are unavailable with factory grounding rings, provide one of the following methods to reduce damage from stray current:

b. Install a maintenance free, circumferential, conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring (equal to AEGIS*SGR) to be field installed on the AC motor to discharge shaft currents to ground.

c. Alternatively, install an inductive absorber equal to CoolBLUE on the power conductors between the VFD and motor.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:


1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Capacitor start, inductor run. 3. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 4. Electronically-Commutated Motor (ECM)

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 19 - 1 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping

SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermometers. 2. Gages. 3. Test plugs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers gages indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, and location for each.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer gage, signed by product manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ashcroft. 2. Marsh. 3. Trerice.

B. Case: Die-cast aluminum Die-cast aluminum or brass, 7 inches long.

C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.

D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.

E. Window: Glass.


F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device.

G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.

H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.

B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES


1. Ashcroft. 2. Marsh. 3. Trerice.

B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100.

1. Case: Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 3” diameter. 2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Ring: Metal. 9. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half scale. 10. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

C. Pressure-Gage Fittings:

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type. 2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends. 3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal disc of

material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.4 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.

B. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F

C. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR. 2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.


D. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, one thermometer(s), and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-meter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig.

2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-meter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F

3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-meter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F.

4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS

A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of air handler heating coils. 2. Inlet and outlet of ducted heating coils. 3. Inlet and outlet of air handler chilled water coils. 4. Inlet and outlet of air-cooled chillers. 5. Install in other locations shown in schematics, details, and drawings.

B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1. Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 2. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 1-degree scale divisions.

3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Install in locations as indicated in schematics, details, and drawings.

1. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. Install liquid-filled case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump. 3. Install in other locations shown in schematics, details, and drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATIONS

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.


H. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

I. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.

J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for meters, gages, machines, and equipment.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 23 - 1 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping

SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves. 2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 3. Bronze swing check valves. 4. Iron swing check valves. 5. Bronze gate valves. 6. Iron gate valves. 7. Chainwheels.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.


B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. 3. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with

chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective

sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.


G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 3. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 4. Hammond Valve. 5. Milwaukee Valve Company. 6. NIBCO INC.

2.3 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure

without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.


d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

2.6 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.7 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.8 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.9 CHAINWHEELS


1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 2. Roto Hammer Industries. 3. Trumbull Industries.


B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve. 2. Attachment: For connection to ball butterfly valve stems. 3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for

valve. Include zinc coating. 4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly and gate valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:


1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or

iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is

indicated in valve schedules below. 5. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or with bronze trim. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 3. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 3. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.

3.6 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 3. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS, bronze.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 3. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 29 - 1 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for pipe hangers and supports. 2. Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Equipment supports.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Available Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 3. Grinnell Corp. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

B. Available Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.


2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.7 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

1. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 2. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 3. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.


B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building

attachments.

H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 4. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange

edge.

I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

2. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

K. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION


A. General: Any hanger load exceeding 40 lbs shall be suspended from the primary structural steel framing or the contractor shall add supplemental framing (such as Unistrut) between the primary framing.

B. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

C. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

E. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

F. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.


b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded

surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.


B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 48.13 - 1 Vibration Controls for HVAC

SECTION 23 05 48.13 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Restrained-spring isolators. 3. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 4. Resilient pipe guides. 5. Elastomeric hangers. 6. Spring hangers. 7. Restrained isolation roof-curb rails.


1. Section 22 05 48.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing" for devices for plumbing equipment and systems.


A. Design Criteria: 1. Mechanical Piping and Equipment components are exempt from the requirements of ASCE 7

Chapter 13 Seismic Design for Nonstructural Components. 2. Refer to Structural General Notes Sheet S100. 3. Building Occupancy Category: III 4. Site Class: D 5. Seismic Design Category: B


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and

size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and damping test data.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc. c. Amber/Booth-Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. d. Vibro-Acoustics.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. 6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 8. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient.

a. Surface Pattern: Smooth pattern. b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=7632

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456867418




2.2 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint: .



2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated

load. 5. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 6. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 7. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or

failure.

2.3 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig (3.45 MPa) on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions.

2.4 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.5 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:


a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc. c. Amber/Booth-Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.










d. Vibro-Acoustics.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.

2.6 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:



2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or

failure. 7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to

support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 9. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.

2.7 RESTRAINED ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS


1. Amber/Booth-Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Vibro-Acoustics.

B. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment.

C. Upper Frame: Upper frame shall provide continuous and captive support for equipment.

D. Lower Support Assembly: The lower support assembly shall be formed sheet metal section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper frame. The lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of rigid glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly. Adjustable, restrained-spring isolators shall be mounted on elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.

E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.









F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over roof materials.

2.8 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation -control devices to indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all vibration isolation devices with approved mechanical equipment submittals.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.


3.5 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Indoor Air Handling Units

1. Isolation Pads: ¾” thick. 2. Supply and Exhaust fan spring isolators, supplied with equipment.

B. Outdoor Air-Cooled Water Chillers

1. Restrained Spring Isolators: 2” deflection, supplied with equipment.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 53 - 1 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags. 4. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by

3/4 inch 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.


B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 CONTROLS EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Printed, self-adhesive labels for identification of major control system components and equipment served.

2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White or Clear. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 by 3/8

inch 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch. 6. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include control system equipment tag and controlled equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Roll form, separate unit from pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Aluminum, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS


A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

2.6 EQUIPMENT CEILING TAGS

A. Self-adhering, printed labels with removable backing.

1. Minimum 3/4” tall clear label with black printed text. 2. Ceiling tag shall include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 CONTROL EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Permanently fasten labels on each major control component, including but not limited to:

1. Variable frequency drives. 2. Equipment controllers. 3. Wall switches. 4. Relays. 5. Field installed sensors and safety devices. 6. Valve and damper actuators.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow

pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.


6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet long each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 8. Wrap flow arrow tape around circumference of pipe on each end of pipe label. Overlap pipe

labels to prevent peeling.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. c. Low Pressure Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round. d. Low Pressure Condensate: 1-1/2 inches, round.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to equipment and other items where required.

3.7 EQUIPMENT CEILING LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Provide equipment ceiling labels on ceiling grid to locate mechanical equipment concealed above finished ceilings. Do not apply equipment ceiling labels at drywall or wood ceilings installed without a grid.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 05 93 - 1 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow systems. b. Variable-flow systems.

3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

E. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

F. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

G. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

H. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

I. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.


J. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

K. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

L. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

M. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

N. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

E. Certified TAB Reports: Submit (prior to completion of the project) two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm specializing in Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of systems and equipment specified in this section and with minimum 5 years documented experience. TAB firm must follow one or a combination of ASHRAE, AABC, TABB, NEEB, or SMACNA procedures and use standard report forms. 1. TAB Firm shall be one of the following:

a. Central Air Balance. b. Maine Air Balance. c. Tekon. d. Yankee Balancing.

B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and

referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from TAB firm's forms approved by Architect.

D. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives; HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.


1. Agenda Items: Include, but not limited following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's " Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, " Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.

G. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 - "Air Balancing."

H. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 - "System Balancing."


A. Certified TAB Report shall be submitted prior to completion of the project.

1. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy portions of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations and aid in Owner occupancy requirements.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.


2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.


3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to

balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111 and this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2013, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.


C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible,

upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that

houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.


1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed

maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record the final fan performance data.


C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-

pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one is installed, and

verify operation of the static-pressure controller. 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to

verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed

minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.

D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow.

3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to

the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor. 7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum

outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against existing pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.


5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor

nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

1. For systems with variable frequency drives, use main balancing device for water flow measurement only, balance water flow with variable frequency drive setpoints to 0 to 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated

flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.


3.10 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure.

E. Check the setting and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through evaporator to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. Set bypass valve or variable frequency drive minimum speed to provide minimum water flow through chiller per manufacturer’s requirements. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by

chiller manufacturer. 3. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 4. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 5. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 6. If air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data including

number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.


3.14 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.15 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.16 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply Fans: 0 to minus 5 percent. 2. Exhaust Fans: 0 to plus 10 percent. 3. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 10 to minus 5 percent. 4. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to plus 5 percent. 5. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to plus 5 percent.

3.17 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.


B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.18 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number

each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:


1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outside airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outside-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.


h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering steam pressure in psi. k. Entering-water temperature in deg F. l. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.


e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

L. Packaged Chiller Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Make and model number. c. Manufacturer's serial number. d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal.


e. Starter type and size. f. Starter thermal protection size. g. Compressor make and model number. h. Compressor manufacturer's serial number.

2. Air-Cooled Condenser Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering- and leaving-air temperature in deg F.

3. Evaporator Test Reports (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

4. Compressor Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Suction pressure in psig. b. Suction temperature in deg F. c. Discharge pressure in psig. d. Discharge temperature in deg F. e. Oil pressure in psig. f. Oil temperature in deg F. g. Voltage at each connection. h. Amperage for each phase. i. Kilowatt input. j. Crankcase heater kilowatt. k. Chilled-water control set point in deg F. l. Condenser-water control set point in deg F. m. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. n. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.

5. Refrigerant Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Oil level. b. Refrigerant level. c. Relief valve setting in psig. d. Unloader set points in psig. e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded. f. Bearing temperatures in deg F. g. Vane position. h. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F.

M. Pump Test Reports (includes existing chilled water pumps): Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm.


g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

N. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.19 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to

the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.


2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect. 3. Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked.

The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment.

3.20 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 07 00 - 1 HVAC Insulation

SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Lagging adhesives. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Field-applied jackets. 8. Tapes. 9. Securements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

D. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.


b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

E. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. b. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

H. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552. Nominal density of 7.5 lb/cu.ft. and compressive strength of 90 psi. Zero water permeability. Thermal conductivity at 75 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Owens Corning; Foam-Glas.

2. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Type II, Class 1, unfaced. 3. Fabricated shapes in accordance with ASTM C450, ASTM C585, and ASTM C1639. 4. Field-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Field-Applied Jackets" Article.


2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:


1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.

1. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. 2. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 3. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft

paper. 4. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.

D. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: Self-sealing vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane 70 mil thick, consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and 1 mil thick laminated aluminum foil top film.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Owens Corning; PittWrap SS.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


1. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.


I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs

from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure

strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams

at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section

"Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks

and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and

with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints,

and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation

surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from


each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and

other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams,

breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.050 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal

between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.


6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent

straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to

valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.8 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch,

and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe

insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve

body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing

insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:


a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation


4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals.

Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation


4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.


a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals.

Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install prefabricated pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. Where voids are difficult to fill with block insulation, fill the voids with a fibrous insulation material suitable for the specific operating temperature.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install prefabricated sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered or routed sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install prefabricated sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing

insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION


A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-

barrier mastic.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, exposed supply ducts in mechanical rooms. 2. Indoor, exposed return ducts in mechanical rooms. 3. Outdoor-air ducts. 4. Outdoor-air and exhaust air plenums. 5. Exhaust ducts between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 6. Exhaust ducts within 10’ of exterior penetration.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 2. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Vibration-control devices. 5. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 6. Exposed supply and return ducts within conditioned spaces.

3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Supply-air duct (new and existing) insulation within mechanical rooms shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Outdoor-air and Exhaust-air plenum insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

D. Return-air duct (new and existing) insulation within mechanical rooms shall be the following:


1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

E. Exhaust-air duct insulation within 10 ft of penetration of building exterior shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.13 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.

C. Chillers: Insulate cold surfaces on chillers, including, but not limited to, evaporator bundles, suction piping, compressor inlets, tube sheets, water boxes, and nozzles with the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

D. Chilled-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following:


E. Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be the following:


F. Chilled-water pump body insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric sheet: 1/2 inch thick.

3.14 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.15 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

B. Chilled Water, above 40 Deg F:

1. All Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.


C. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below:

1. Piping Up to 3” NPS: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. Piping 4” and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inch thick.

D. Refrigerant Piping:

1. Indoor, All Sizes (new and existing): Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

E. Low Pressure Steam (less than 10 psi):

1. Piping 3” NPS and smaller:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.

2. Piping 4” NPS and Larger:


F. Low Pressure Steam Condensate:

1. Piping 1-1/2” NPS and smaller:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

2. Piping 2” NPS and Larger:


3.16 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Piping:

1. All Sizes (new and existing): Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-1/2 inch thick.

3.17 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Piping:

1. All Sizes (new and existing): Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inch thick.

3.18 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE


A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Exterior Refrigerant Piping Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco stamped with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.024 inch thick.

C. Exterior Underground Refrigerant Piping:

1. Bituminous jacket with aluminum top film: 0.070 inch thick.

3.19 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. ALL exposed piping in occupied areas:

1. PVC: 0.020 inch thick.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 09 00 - 1 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC

SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. GUI: Graphical User Interface.

C. I/O: Input/output.

D. BACnet: Building Automation and Control Network.

E. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control devices and networks.

F. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

G. PC: Personal computer.

H. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system shall be Direct Digital Control (DDC) with equipment furnished, installed, and guaranteed by the Temperature Control Contractor.

B. The system shall be fully open architecture platform, BACnet or LON.

C. The Temperature Control Contractor shall provide a complete system operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on a network of micro processor based direct digital automatic temperature controls as herein specified, including all components as indicated and required to achieve the Sequence of Operation and connection to devices specified and furnished with equipment under other Sections.

D. Control system shall permit web-browser based interface with the network via dynamic color graphics, optimized for mobile devices, with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.


E. Work includes, but is not limited to, the following;

1. Hardware, microprocessors, controllers. 2. Software. 3. Thermostats and sensors. 4. Relays and switches. 5. Control Valves and actuators. 6. Control Dampers and actuators. 7. Control Panels and cabinets. 8. Application specific controllers. 9. I/O Devices, transducers. 10. Variable Frequency Controllers (VFDs). 11. Control Wiring and wiring of Control Devices. 12. Sequence of Operation.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk data

conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

10. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list.


C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.

D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

E. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.

F. MAC address: Contractor shall obtain the MAC address for all equipment and confirm DHCP compatibility with the University IT Department.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has a minimum of 5-years experience in automatic control systems for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperature-control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."

E. Comply with ASHRAE 135-P for BACnet interoperability with all devices.

F. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

C. Store control components indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect control components from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

1.9 COORDINATION


A. Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate MAC address for all equipment and confirm DHCP compatibility with the University IT Department. All controls work shall be coordinated with the University IT Department prior to installation.

C. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

D. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.

E. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following per the Owner’s Project Requirements (no substitutions permitted):

1. Honeywell International, Inc. 2. Johnson Controls, Inc.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on the existing fiberoptic network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation (located in the HVAC Shop at the Steam Plant) permits interface with the existing fiberoptic network via dynamic color graphics, optimized for mobile devices, with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

C. Provide UPS back-up at all control panels to provide power to controllers and devices for a minimum of 30 minutes.

D. Existing pneumatic control system shall continue to operate to serve terminal units, unit heaters and all other devices not specified or shown on the drawings to be removed.

2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Control Units: Modular, with color coded LED status indicators; comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.


e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment.

3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover. c. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging;

weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access.

d. Remote communications. e. Maintenance management. f. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).

4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

B. Local Control Units: Modular, with color coded LED status indicators; comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

C. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or

resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open or

normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20

mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer. 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type

electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

D. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.


2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes.

3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

E. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.3 ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor.

B. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer.

C. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.

D. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct or reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode.

1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig.

2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig. 3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent. 4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal of zero to supply

pressure. 5. Gages: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy, and range to match transmitter

input or output pressure.

2.4 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.


2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

6. Current Sensors: Solid state, split core linear current sensors shall be provided where specified.

a. Linear output of 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA. b. Scale sensors so that average operating current is between 20-80% full scale. c. Accuracy plus or minus 1.0% (5-100% full scale) d. Operating frequency 50-600 Hz. e. Operating Temperature 5-104 deg. F ( -15 – 40 deg. C), Operating Humidity 0-95% non-

condensing f. Approvals CE, UL.

7. Water Flow Meters: Water flow meters shall be axial turbine style flow meters which translate liquid motion into electronic output signals proportional to the flow sensed.

a. Flow sensing turbine rotors shall be non-metallic and not impaired by magnetic drag. b. Flow meters shall be ‘insertion’ type complete with ‘hot-tap’ isolation valves to enable

sensor removal without water supply system shutdown. c. Accuracy shall be + 2% of actual reading from 0.4 to 20 feet per second flow velocities.

8. Carbon Dioxide Sensors

a. Carbon Dioxide sensors shall be 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, or 4-20 mA linear analog output type, with corrosion free gold-plated non-dispersive infrared sensing, designed for duct or wall mounting.

b. Sensor shall incorporate internal diagnostics for power, sensor, analog output checking, and automatic background calibration algorithm for reduced maintenance. Sensor range shall be 0-2000 PPM with +/- 75 PPM accuracy at full scale.

c. Sensor shall have an LCD display that displays the sensor reading and status.

9. Annular Pitot Tube Flow Meter. Annular pitot tube shall be averaging type differential pressure sensors with four total head pressure ports and one static port made of austenitic stainless steel.

a. Sensor shall have an accuracy of ±.25% of full flow and a repeatability of ±.05% of

measured value. b. Transmitter shall be electronic and shall produce a linear output of 0-10 Vdc, 0-5 Vdc, or 4

to 20 mA dc corresponding to the required flow span. c. The transmitter shall include non-interacting zero and span adjustments.

2.5 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg.

B. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

C. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

D. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.


E. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

F. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.

2.6 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm:

Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm:

Increase running torque by 2.0.

3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear

release on nonspring-return actuators. 6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return). 7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. 9. Temperature Rating: 40 to 104 deg F. 10. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.

2.7 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.


1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade

seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.8 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Duct Airflow Station: Factory assembled combination of air straightener and multiport, self-averaging pitot tube station. Basis of design: Ruskin AMS.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Air Monitor Corporation. b. Ruskin, Inc. c. Wetmaster Co., Ltd.

2. Casing: Galvanized steel frame with duct flanges. 3. Flow Straightener: Aluminum honeycomb, 3/4-inch parallel cell, 3 inches deep. 4. Sensing Manifold: Aluminum, bullet-nosed static pressure sensor tubes positioned on equal area

basis. 5. Controls: Factory installed averaging controls with output to DDC system.

2.9 THERMOSTATS

A. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

B. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type, with adjustable set point in middle of range and adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

C. Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

D. Electric High-Limit Duct Sensor/Discharge Sensor.

E. Space Thermostats: Wall mounted microprocessor based.

1. DDC Thermostat with LCD readout, set-point, and manual occupant override. All thermostats shall be by a single manufacturer.

2. Combination DDC Thermostat with CO2 Sensor: Provide combination DDC thermostat with CO2 sensor (single enclosure) in spaces requiring both sensor devices. Thermostat shall include LCD readout, set-point, manual occupant override, CO2 readout, alarm, and adjustable CO2 alarm level.

3. Combination DDC Thermostat with CO2 and Occupancy Sensor: Provide combination DDC thermostat with CO2 and occupancy sensor (single enclosure) in spaces noted in Drawings. Thermostat shall include LCD readout, set-point, manual occupant override, CO2 readout, alarm, adjustable CO2 alarm level and occupancy signal output.


4. In public spaces, and where noted on the drawings, provide blank DDC wall temperature sensors with override button but without LCD display.

2.10 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS

A. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BMS manufacturer’s standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.

B. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as specified and in-dicated on the plans, and I/O devices—such as relays, transducers, and so forth—that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function. Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted.

C. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw terminals.

D. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.

E. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.

F. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused on/off power switch, and required transformers.

2.11 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS (VFDs)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following;

1. Eaton. 2. Honeywell. 3. Reliance. 4. Toshiba. 5. Yaskawa.

B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of a NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase, premium-efficiency induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Units shall be provided with main power disconnect.

C. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

D. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range.

E. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Capable of driving full load, under the following conditions, without derating:

a. Ambient Temperature: Minus 10 to 40 deg C. b. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (non-condensing). c. Altitude: 3300 feet.

4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent.


6. Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds. 7. Starting Torque: 150 percent of rated torque or as indicated. 8. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. 9. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 40:1 speed range.

F. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 1 second. 4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 1 second. 5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.

G. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and overcurrent trips. 2. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA 250, Class 20 performance. 3. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 4. Reverse-phase protection. 5. Short-circuit protection. 6. Motor overtemperature fault.

H. Automatic Reset and Restart: To attempt ten restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.

I. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped.

J. Torque Boost: Automatically vary starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to insure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

K. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

L. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Line fault.

M. Alphanumeric Display: Liquid-crystal type, 16 characters, minimum.

N. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

O. Indicating Devices: Digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (VDC). 9. Set-point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V).


P. Control Signal Interface: Provide from VFC Lon interface communications module, with the following;

1. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from other control systems:

a. 0 to 10-V dc. b. 4 to 20 mA. c. Keypad display for local hand operation.

2. Output Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (4-20 mA), which can be programmed to either of the following:

1) DC-link voltage (VDC). 2) Set-point frequency (Hz).

3. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set-point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high or low speed limits reached.

Q. Communications: Provide an LON communications card allowing VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory. LON communications module connected directly with LON communications bus for information and programming.

R. Accessories

1. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 3. Standard Displays:

a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Set-point frequency (Hz).

4. Motor current (amperes).

a. Motor full-load current (amperes). b. DC-link voltage (VDC). c. Motor torque (percent). d. Motor speed (rpm). e. Motor output voltage (V). f. Motor output power (kW). g. Status: Forward or reverse.

5. Historical Logging Information and Displays: 6. Total run time. 7. Fault log, maintaining last four faults.

2.12 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances. 2. Public areas.

D. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

H. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."

I. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable shall be run together and supported every 4-feet. All wiring shall be at

right angles to building structure. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables

follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion.

Tie and support conductors.


6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables.

7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections.

B. Commissioning Agent: Coordinate and schedule with owners Commissioning Agent, calibrating, adjusting, and verification of all instrumentation controls system operating points.

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist. 4. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation

with compatible signal generator. 5. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set

points are as required. 6. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of

operation. Adjust PID actions. 7. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 8. Test software and hardware interlocks.

D. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and

other applicable considerations. 4. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is

identified and that meters are installed correctly. 5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained

pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved

tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

E. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING


A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

B. Adjust initial temperature and system set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: The controls manufacturer shall provide a representative for a service call monthly to confirm proper operation of the systems and equipment. The service calls shall be for the one-year warranty period and commence one month after substantial completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Provide a minimum of 8-hours of on-site technical and operational training. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renova-tion

23 09 93 - 1 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls

SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Control Sequences for HVAC systems and equipment.

B. Provide a complete Direct Digital Control (DDC) System.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and devices and for submittal requirements.

1.3 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Packaged Chiller (CH-1) specified with factory furnished and installed control package. Refer to Specification Sections 236423 “Scroll Water Chillers”. Coordinate and integrate with building controls system.

B. Chiller shall stage compressors based on facility demand to maintain chilled water setpoint. 1. Prior to a chiller starting, chilled water pump shall start and prove flow via flow switch. Once

water flow is confirmed chiller shall start and stage compressors as necessary to maintain system chilled water setpoint.

2. If chiller fails to start an alarm shall be generated at the DDC system.

C. Chilled-Water Supply Temperature Control: System resets chilled-water supply temperature according to highest cooling demand during occupied and unoccupied periods. Basis of design chilled water supply temperature 42F, reset up to maximum 50F (adjustable) when low demand.

D. Existing Chilled-Water Circulating Pump Control: (P-3E, P-4E & P-5E)

1. Interlock with chiller. System starts pump and proves flow through chiller before allowing chiller to start.

2. Existing pumps are constant volume. 3. Lead pump shall run to maintain system differential pressure set point of 30 psi, adjustable (to be

determined during balancing) as sensed by existing differential pressure sensor. If differential pressure exceeds setpoint by more than 10% for 30 seconds (adjustable), existing bypass valve shall modulate to maintain setpoint. If differential pressure drops below setpoint by more than 20% for 30 seconds (adjustable) the second pump shall start.

4. When both pumps are running, if differential pressure exceeds setpoint by more than 10% the lag pump shall shut off.

5. Provide lead / lag and rotation of pumps. The respective pumps shall rotate on a monthly basis.

E. Control points to be provided and shown on the graphic page are as follows:



1. DDC system graphic, include button with the Sequence of Operation text. 2. Outside air temperature. 3. Outside air humidity. 4. On / off status for chiller. 5. Chiller % load. 6. Instantaneous btus for each chiller. 7. Chilled water supply reset schedule. 8. Chilled water supply temperature. 9. Chilled water return temperature. 10. On / off status for each pump. 11. Lead/Lag and rotation schedule. 12. Differential pressure (setpoint). 13. Differential pressure (measured). 14. Bypass valve position. 15. Common trouble alarm from Packaged Chiller factory furnished control package. 16. Alarm status. 17. Alarm codes, include button with manufacturer’s reference trouble codes.

F. Control points from the chiller factory controls to be displayed on the graphics page for monitoring purposes:

1. Evaporator entering water temperature. 2. Evaporator leaving water temperature. 3. Leaving water temperature reset. 4. Evaporator flow switch status. 5. Solenoid valve position, for each circuit. 6. Suction temperature, for each circuit. 7. Compressor status of each compressor. 8. Condenser fan status of each fan.

1.4 HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Existing steam plant shall continue to operate with existing sequence.

B. Steam – Hot Water Heat Exchangers (HX-1E):

1. The steam control valves (1/3 - 2/3 arrangement) shall modulate to maintain outlet water temperature setpoint (adjustable). If a valve fails to open an alarm shall be generated.

2. Hot Water Supply Temperature Control: a. Provide a sensor in the hot water supply to reset the hot water supply verses outside air.

The steam control valve(s) shall modulate to provide the reset water schedule as follows (all points adjustable):

Outside air temperature Hot water supply temperature <0°F 200°F

>70°F 120°F

3. Control points to be provided and shown on the graphic page are as follows: a. DDC system graphic, include button with the Sequence of Operation text. b. Heat exchanger tag and location. c. Outside air temperature. d. Hot water supply temperature. e. Hot water supply temperature setpoint. f. Hot water supply reset schedule. g. Hot water return temperature. h. Steam control valve commanded position, for each valve.



i. Control valve end switch status. j. Alarm status.

C. Heating Hot Water Pump Control: (P-1E & P-2E)

1. Hot water pump(s) shall operate with existing controls.

1.5 SINGLE ZONE VAV AIR HANDLING UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCE (AHU-1)

A. Air handling system shall start through DDC system provided all safeties have been satisfied.

B. Occupied: System commands supply fans to run continuously when building is occupied.

C. Optimum Start: Units shall start prior to the programmed occupied period in a warm-up/cool-down se-quence (with outside air dampers closed) in order to achieve occupied space temperature for the start of the occupied period.

D. Fan Control: When the fans start during the occupied mode the outside air and return air dampers shall

open to their minimum position. The respective VFD’s on the supply fans shall provide for a soft start and ramp to provide and maintain the scheduled minimum airflow. Fans shall increase speed as necessary if room setpoint is not achieved with fans at minimum speed.

1. If fan status is ‘on’ but fan airflow sensor records no airflow, an alarm shall be generated. 2. Each fan shall have inlet air flow measuring stations for monitoring.

E. Outdoor Airflow Monitoring: Air handling units scheduled and specified furnished with factory installed

airflow outdoor airflow measuring stations. System shall continually monitor outdoor airflow and signal alarm to the DDC system if less than scheduled minimum.

F. Demand Controlled Ventilation: A space mounted CO2 sensor shall increase the fan speeds and also mod-

ulate the outside air beyond minimum position to maintain maximum space CO2 setpoint of 900 ppm (ad-justable). When space CO2 levels are below 850 ppm (adjustable) the outside air dampers shall return to minimum position and fan speed down to minimum.

G. Stop Mode: The supply fan and return fans will be off, the outside air damper will be closed, and the heat-

ing valve will be full open. H. Smoke detection: Stop fans, and return system to STOP mode upon a signal from the fire alarm system.

Wiring from the fire alarm device to the motor starters provided under Division 26. I. Freeze Protection: Provide a manual reset freeze stat across the heating coil to stop the fan, close the out-

side air damper, fully open heating control valve, and alarm the DDC system if the freeze stat trips. Freeze stat setpoint at 38 deg F (adjustable).

J. Steam Coil Control: When the outside air temperature is 35 deg F or less (adjustable) the steam 2/3 control

valve shall be fully open and the face and bypass dampers shall modulate to maintain discharge setpoint. If required to maintain setpoint the steam 1/3 control valve shall open and supplement the 2/3 control valve capacity. When the outside air is greater than 35 deg F the face damper shall be 100% open and the bypass damper 100% closed. Steam control valves shall modulate to maintain discharge setpoint.

K. Supply Air Temperature Control: During occupied periods system modulates economizer dampers, chilled water control valve, and steam control valve to maintain space temperature occupied set-point (70 deg F, heating and 76 deg F, cooling, adjustable) as follows:

1. A mixed air sensor located in the mixing box, averaging type, shall monitor the mixed air temperature and determine whether additional heating or cooling are necessary based on space temperature.



2. When the space thermostat calls for cooling, the chilled water control valve shall modulate open to maintain room setpoint. The minimum cooling discharge air setpoint shall be 55 deg F (adjustable). If space temperature is not maintained at the minimum discharge temperature the supply fans shall increase speed, up to design maximum, to maintain room setpoint.

3. When the space thermostat calls for heating, the steam control valves shall stage and modulate open to meet room set point. The maximum heating discharge air setpoint shall be 95 deg F (adjustable). If space temperature is not maintained at the maximum discharge temperature the supply fans shall increase speed, up to design maximum, to maintain room setpoint.

4. If space temperature is satisfied, discharge temperature shall maintain deadband between 70 and 76 deg F (adjustable).

L. Economizer: On a call for cooling, if the enthalpy of the outside air is less than the enthalpy of the return

air the outside air dampers shall modulate open past minimum position up to 100% open. The return air damper shall operate inversely of the outside air damper to permit “free cooling” with outside air. Mechan-ical cooling shall operate only to supplement economizer operation to meet discharge air setpoint when the AHU is in economizer cooling.

1. During economizer operation, mixed air temperature sensor shall provide a low temperature limit set at 54 deg F (adjustable) to prevent over cooling/reheating. If temperature drops below setpoint, outside air dampers shall modulate close until setpoint is maintained.

2. During normal operation at minimum fan speeds, and when demand control is active, it is acceptable for the mixed air temperature to be below this setpoint.

M. Space Pressurization: Wall mounted space pressure sensor shall modulate the motorized relief air dampers to maintain a slight positive pressure setpoint of 0.07” wc (adjustable). When air handler is off, or operating in 100% recirculation mode, the motorized relief air dampers shall be closed.

N. Unoccupied: The supply fans shall remain off and outside air dampers closed. Fans shall cycle (with dampers in recirculation mode), economizer dampers, steam control valve and chilled water control valve shall modulate to maintain unoccupied setpoint (64 deg F, heating; 80 deg F, cooling, adjustable).

O. Control points to be provided and shown on the graphic page are as follows:

1. DDC system graphic. 2. DDC system on-off indication. 3. DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode. 4. Space temperature. 5. Space temperature setpoint. 6. CO2 level. 7. CO2 level setpoint. 8. Damper position of each damper. 9. Outdoor airflow setpoint, minimum, and actual measured, CFM. 10. Outdoor-air-temperature. 11. Supply-air-temperature. 12. Return air-temperature. 13. Mixed air temperature. 14. Mixed air temperature low limit setpoint. 15. Water-to-water heat pump status/stage. 16. Water valve position for each valve. 17. Water-to-water heat pump mode (heating or cooling) 18. Pump status. 19. Pump speed. 20. Supply water temperature. 21. Supply water temperature setpoint. 22. Return water temperature. 23. Supply fan status. 24. VFD frequency and % speed. 25. Supply fan(s) airflow. 26. Return fan status.



27. VFD frequency and % speed. 28. Return fan(s) airflow. 29. Smoke detection alarm. 30. Freeze protection alarm. 31. Fan alarm.

1.6 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCE (AHU-2)

A. Air handling system shall start through DDC system provided all safeties have been satisfied.

1. Existing supply and return air smoke isolation dampers shall open, and prove position prior to fans starting. When unit is off, smoke dampers shall close.

B. Occupied: System commands supply and exhaust fans to run continuously when building is occupied.

C. Fan Control: When the fans start during the occupied mode the outside air, return air, and exhaust air dampers shall open to their minimum. The respective VFD’s on the supply and return fans shall provide for a soft start and ramp to maintain a supply duct static pressure setpoints initially set at 2.5 inch wc. (adjustable), to be confirmed during balancing. The return fan operation shall be interlocked with the supply fan. The return fan shall modulate speed to maintain volume equal to the total supply air volume as read by airflow measuring stations. Two supply duct static pressure sensors shall be located in the associated duct system at 2/3 of the furthest runs.

D. Outdoor Airflow Monitoring: Air handling units scheduled and specified furnished with factory installed airflow outdoor airflow measuring stations. System shall continually monitor outdoor airflow and signal alarm to the DDC system if less than scheduled minimum.

E. Stop Mode: The supply fan and exhaust fans will be off, the outside air damper will be closed, and the heating valve will be fully closed. Mixed air temperature sensor shall cycle steam control valve as required to maintain a low-limit cabinet temperature of 50 deg F (adjustable) to prevent chilled water coil freezing.

F. Smoke detection: Stop fans, and return system to STOP mode upon a signal from the fire alarm system. Wiring from the fire alarm device to the motor starters provided under Division 26. Provide status of each fan and alarm the DDC system if a fan fails to start.

G. Freeze Protection: Provide a manual reset freeze stat across the heating coil to stop the fan, close the outside air damper, fully open heating control valve, and alarm the DDC system if the freeze stat trips.

H. Steam Coil Control: When the outside air temperature is 35 deg F or less (adjustable) the steam 2/3 control valve shall be fully open and the face and bypass dampers shall modulate to maintain discharge setpoint. If required to maintain setpoint the steam 1/3 control valve shall open and supplement the 2/3 control valve capacity. When the outside air is greater than 35 deg F the face damper shall be 100% open and the bypass damper 100% closed. Steam control valves shall modulate to maintain discharge setpoint.

I. Supply Air Temperature Control: During occupied periods system modulates the chilled water control valve, and steam coil control valve to maintain supply air temperature occupied setpoint. During morning warm up supply air temperature shall be increased to achieve room setpoint. During unoccupied periods maintain unoccupied set-point. A mixed air sensor located in the mixing box, averaging type, shall monitor the mixed air temperature. Provide supply air reset based on outside air temperature as follows:

1. At outdoor temperatures of 70 deg F or greater provide 55 deg F supply air (adjustable). 2. At outdoor temperatures of 0 deg F or less provide 65 deg F supply air (adjustable). 3. Reset cooling supply linearly between the two points.

J. Economizer: On a call for cooling, if the enthalpy of the outside air is less than the enthalpy of the return air, the outside air dampers shall modulate past minimum (up to full open) position and the return damper shall inversely track the outside air damper to permit “free cooling” with outside air. Mechanical cooling



shall operate to supplement economizer operation and to meet discharge air setpoint when the AHU is in economizer cooling.

1. An outdoor air high limit setpoint of 28 btu/lb (adjustable) shall reduce the percentage of outside air used during economizer operation to prevent excess humidity from entering building during economizer cycles.

K. Unoccupied: Outside and exhaust air dampers shall remain closed and fans shall remain off. If a zone calls for cooling during the unoccupied period the supply fan shall start, and the chilled water valve shall modulate as necessary to maintain cooling discharge setpoint. Perimeter hot water heating terminals and fan powered boxes shall cycle as necessary to maintain unoccupied heating setpoint (programmed at existing zone controls).

L. Control points to be provided and shown on the graphic page are as follows:

1. DDC system graphic, include button with the Sequence of Operation text. 2. DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode. 3. Damper position of each damper. 4. Outdoor airflow setpoint, minimum, and actual measured, CFM. 5. Outdoor air temperature. 6. Outdoor air humidity. 7. Outdoor air enthalpy. 8. Outdoor air enthalpy high limit setpoint. 9. Economizer mode (enabled/disabled). 10. Supply air temperature. 11. Supply air temperature setpoint. 12. Supply air reset schedule. 13. Return air-temperature. 14. Return air humidity. 15. Return air enthalpy. 16. Steam control-valve position, each valve. 17. Steam coil leaving air temperature. 18. Chilled water control valve position. 19. Cooling coil leaving air temperature. 20. Chilled water supply water temperature. 21. Chilled water return water temperature. 22. Smoke detection alarm. 23. Smoke damper position. 24. Smoke damper end switch status. 25. Fan Status, for each fan. 26. VFD frequency, for each fan. 27. VFD operating current in amps for each fan. 28. Supply duct static pressure(s). 29. Supply duct static pressure setpoint. 30. Airflow reading for each fan, CFM. 31. Mixed air temperature. 32. Mixed air temperature set point. 33. Mixed air low limit temperature setpoint. 34. Freeze Protection Alarm. 35. Air filter differential pressure drop for each filter bank. 36. Alarm codes, include button with manufacturer’s reference trouble codes.

1.7 MONITORING

A. In addition to the points indicated in this section for specific equipment sequences and operation, provide Monitoring and Logging of Mechanical & Electrical Systems, per Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC”.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 21 13 - 1 Hydronic Piping

SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping. 2. Makeup-water piping. 3. Condensate-drain piping. 4. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-

orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 3. Air control devices. 4. Hydronic specialties.


C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.


1. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Acceptable fitting manufacturers based on Owner requirements: Flagg, Stockham, Ward.

C. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Ductile-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.42, Class 150; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. Acceptable gasket manufacturers based on Owner requirements: Flexitallic, Leader, Parker.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.


C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.


C. Dielectric Unions:

1. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong. b. Bell & Gossett. c. Flowdesign Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Taco. f. Watts.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded.


7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 3. Sarco. 4. Spirotherm, Spirovent. 5. Taco.

B. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

C. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

D. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Basis of Design: Taco CBX. 2. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating

temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

3. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

4. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

E. Micro-Bubble Air Separators:

1. Basis of Design: Taco 4900 Series. 2. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and

270 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Media: High surface pall rings. 4. Vent Chamber: Brass construction with flushing cock. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 3 and smaller. 6. Blowdown: Threaded connection with blowdown valve. 7. Performance, capacity, and size: Match system flow capacity, velocity, and as scheduled on the

drawings.


2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Acceptable manufacturers based on Owner requirements: Crane, Stokham, Walworth. 2. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 3. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent

free area. 5. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced EPDM rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be either of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-iron fittings, and threaded joints.

B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be either of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange

fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

C. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

D. Condensate drain piping shall be one of the following:

1. Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Solid wall Schedule 40 PVC with DWV pattern fittings and cemented joints.

E. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to piping mains, and at supply and return connections to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.


3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

T. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.


B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a

trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching

pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION




D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.


G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet with a 2 percent upward slope.

D. Install air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

E. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system project requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure.

If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable

of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's

working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."


5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely

(automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers to specified

values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 22 13 - 1 Steam and Condensate Heating Piping

SECTION 23 22 13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for LP steam and condensate piping within buildings:

1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Strainers. 3. Safety valves. 4. Steam traps. 5. Thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LP Systems: Low-pressure piping operating at 15 psig or less as required by ASME B31.9.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Pressure-reducing valves. 4. Safety valves. 5. Steam traps.

a. Submit steam trap schedule for each service and equipment tag. 6. Air vent and vacuum breakers.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control test reports. Pressure test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves, pressure-reducing valves, steam traps, air vents, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


C. Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the following: 1. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and

that certification is current.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, plain ends, Type, Grade, and Schedule as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles

B. Acceptable fitting manufacturers based on Owner requirements: Flagg, Stockham, Ward.

C. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 150, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles.

D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3; Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles.

E. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles.

F. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.

G. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

H. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel of same Type, Grade, and Schedule as pipe in which installed.

J. Stainless-Steel Bellows, Flexible Connectors: 1. Acceptable manufacturers based on Owner requirements: ADSCO, Advanced Thermal, Yarway 2. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforced, protective jacket. 3. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 4. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 5. CWP Rating: 150-psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. Acceptable gasket manufacturers based on Owner requirements: Flexitallic, Leader, Parker.


B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

D. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.


C. Dielectric Unions:

1. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

2.4 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe and Check Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

2.5 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Acceptable manufacturers based on Owner requirements: Crane, Stokham, Walworth. 2. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 3. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for strainers

NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20 mesh strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 5. Tapped blowoff plug. 6. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure.


2.6 SAFETY VALVES

A. Bronze or Brass Safety Valves:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. c. Kunkle.

2. Disc Material: Forged copper alloy. 3. End Connections: Threaded inlet and outlet. 4. Spring: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff, factory set

and sealed. 5. Pressure Class: 250. 6. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying with

ASME B1.20.1. 7. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code.

2.7 STEAM TRAPS

A. Thermostatic Traps: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Armstrong International, Inc. TS2. b. Barnes & Jones 122 & 134. c. Sarco.

2. Body: Bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece and screw-in cap. 3. Trap Type: Balanced-pressure. 4. Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 5. Head and Seat: Replaceable, hardened stainless steel. 6. Pressure Class: 125.

B. Thermodynamic Traps: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones. c. Sarco.

2. Body: Stainless steel with screw-in cap. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Disc and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Maximum Operating Pressure: 600 psig.

C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:


2. Body and Bolted Cap: ASTM A 126, cast iron. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Float Mechanism: Replaceable, stainless steel. 5. Head and Seat: Hardened stainless steel. 6. Trap Type: Balanced pressure.


7. Thermostatic Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 8. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F of superheat and resisting water hammer

without sustaining damage. 9. Vacuum Breaker: Thermostatic with phosphor bronze bellows, and stainless steel cage, valve, and

seat. 10. Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig.

D. Inverted Bucket Traps: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:


2. Body and Cap: Cast iron. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Head and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Valve Retainer, Lever, and Guide Pin Assembly: Stainless steel. 6. Bucket: Brass or stainless steel. 7. Strainer: Integral stainless-steel inlet strainer within the trap body. 8. Air Vent: Stainless-steel thermostatic vent. 9. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.

2.8 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS AND VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Thermostatic Air Vents: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:


2. Body: Cast iron, bronze or stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Float, Valve, and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Thermostatic Element: Phosphor bronze bellows in a stainless-steel cage. 6. Pressure Rating: 300 psig. 7. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

B. Vacuum Breakers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:


2. Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Sealing Ball, Retainer, Spring, and Screen: Stainless steel. 5. O-ring Seal: EPR. 6. Pressure Rating: 300 psig. 7. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. LP Steam Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40, Type S, Grade A, steel pipe; Class 150 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. LP Steam Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Schedule 40, Type E, Grade A, steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

3.2 CONDENSATE PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Condensate piping, NPS 2 and smaller, Schedule 80, Type S, Grade A, steel pipe; Class 300 malleable iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Condensate piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, Schedule 80, Type E, Grade A, steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam supply mains, at steam supply connections to equipment, and at the outlet of steam traps.

B. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:

1. Shutoff Duty: Gate valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Globe valves.

C. Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Use indicated piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.


H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

K. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

L. Install steam supply piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of steam flow.

M. Install condensate return piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of condensate flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to top of main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."

U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

V. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, and control valves.

1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding 100 feet.

2. Size drip legs same size as main. In steam mains NPS 6 and larger, drip leg size can be reduced, but to no less than NPS 4

3.5 GENERAL STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION

A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment.

B. Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve, and full-port ball valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 LP STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS


A. Float and Thermostatic Traps: LP steam main and riser drip legs, heat exchangers, heating coils, and humidifiers.

3.7 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." ASME B31.1"

B. Pipe safety-valve discharge without valves to atmosphere outside the building.

C. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain.


A. Install hangers and supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing.


1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a

trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 15 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 21 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 24 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.





D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:




E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.10 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection.

D. Install a drip leg at coil outlet.


A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure.

If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable

of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

B. Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength.

3. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

C. Prepare written report of testing.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 23 00 - 1 Refrigerant Piping

SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig 2. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Solenoid valves. 4. Strainers. 5. Pressure-regulating valves.


C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Other building services. 3. Structural members.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."


1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of equipment supports, and wall penetrations.

B. Coordinate with refrigerant piping specified and scheduled to be furnished with equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

E. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-wg

assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig

B. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F

C. Thermostatic Expansion Valves:

1. Comply with ARI 750. 2. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.


3. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 4. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 5. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 6. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). 7. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.

D. Solenoid Valves:

1. Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 3. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 4. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 6. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-

inch conduit adapter, and 24 -V ac coil. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

E. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F

F. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter

screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

G. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers:

1. Comply with ARI 730. 2. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene

gaskets. 3. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 4. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal. 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

H. Isolation Valves: Including refrigerant access port.

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Ball: Full port. 3. Stem: Rupture proof, encapsulated stem seal. 4. Continuous operating temperature: -40 deg F to 300 deg F.


5. Maximum pressure: 775 psig. 6. UL Listed

2.3 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection.

B. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

C. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not

mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure

at bulb location.

D. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

E. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

F. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Compressor.

G. Install flexible connectors at compressors.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 and per equipment manufacturer’s installation requirements.


C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

L. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

M. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 3. Liquid lines may be installed level.

N. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

O. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.

P. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation.

R. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.

S. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods.

T. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.


C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.


A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers. 2. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span 48 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 48 inches minimum rod size, 1/4 inch 3. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches minimum rod size, 1/4 inch 4. NPS 1: Maximum span, 60 inches minimum rod size, 1/4 inch 5. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 72 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 6. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 7. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch


A. Contractor shall perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI and equipment manufacturer’s requirements for testing. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and

safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures

indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap

and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Provide refrigerant to charge all systems per manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for

12 hours, system is ready for charging.


3. Verify with manufacturer’s written instructions that the system is charged with the correct volume of refrigerant.

4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig 5. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 2. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 3. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 4. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 25 00 - 1 HVAC Water Treatment

SECTION 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the water treatment systems for the followings:

1. Closed hydronic systems, including chilled water.


A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without posing a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders. 2. Chemical material safety data sheets.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance Requirements" Article above.

2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE


A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for closed loop systems. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and shall include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations. 2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially fill

systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation. 3. Perform field service, consultation, and water testing. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Laboratory technical analysis. 6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with government

regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 5 gallon 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig. 3. Basis of Design: JL Wingert

2.2 CHEMICALS

A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment.

B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.

C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.

D. Closed-Loop Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.

E. Freeze Protection Heat Transfer Fluid: Inhibited Propylene Glycol mixed with water to 40% percent by volume as indicated on the Drawings for the chilled water system. Fluid shall be food safe grade, dyed yellow, and be safe for use with aluminum equal to DOWFROST.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION


A. Install chemical application equipment level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled water zones. 1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps as indicated on the drawings and

schematics.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation. 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned,

flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved.

4. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

5. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

6. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

7. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Field verify percent of glycol in freeze protected water systems after initial fill. Adjust glycol balance as necessary to achieve design percentages.

E. At 3-month intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis to Owner.

F. DEMONSTRATION


1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 31 13 - 1 Metal Ducts

SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing.


8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."


2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. 2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded

longitudinal seams.

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

2. Stainless reinforcements shall be used on stainless steel ductwork.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.


2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. 3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane. 4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. 5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. 6. Water resistant. 7. Mold and mildew resistant. 8. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 9. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 10. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and

fitting spigots.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.


C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.


L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless otherwise indicated.

1. For static-pressure classes 1 inch wg, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class C.

2. For static-pressure classes 2 inch wg, and above comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class A, all traverse joints, all longitudinal seams, and all duct wall penetrations.

3. For positive pressure exhaust ducts, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class A, all traverse joints, all longitudinal seams, and all duct wall penetrations.

4. Install sealant materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s surface preparation and installation instructions.

5. Exposed un-insulated ducts: Apply sealant NEATLY. Caulking and finish painting of exposed ductwork is specified in Division 7 and Division 9.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more

than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs

less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for


Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

3.7 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected downstream of Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

2. Ducts Connected to General Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3.

C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.


b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to General Use Fume Hoods:

a. Type 316L, stainless-steel sheet. b. Exposed to View: No. 4 finish. c. Concealed: No. 2D finish. d. 100% flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets or welded seams and joints. e. Pressure Class: Negative 6-inch wg. f. Airtight/Watertight.

2. Ducts Connected to Chemistry Lab Acid/Base Fume Hoods:

a. Type 316L, halar-coated stainless-steel sheet. b. Exposed to View: No. 4 finish. c. Concealed: No. 2D finish. d. 100% flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets. e. Pressure Class: Negative 6-inch wg. f. Airtight/Watertight.

3. Ducts Serving Restroom Riser and Branches:

a. Galvanized Steel. (Branch take off at main shall be 316 Stainless Steel) b. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. c. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. e. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.

F. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel.

G. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:


1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded.

H. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Bellmouth.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 33 00 - 1 Air Duct Accessories

SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Flange connectors. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct-mounted access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts. 8. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Duct-mounted access doors. d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.

E. Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.


L. Bearings: Synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

N. Sleeve: Minimum 20-gage thickness.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. McGill AirFlow LLC. d. Nailor Industries Inc. e. Ruskin Company.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of

damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 1-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at

each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-

damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.


3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.5 TURNING VANES


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch-wide, single-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 2 inches o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. For duct widths 36” and larger utilize 4-inch wide, single-vane, curved blades set at 4 inches on center.

2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow LLC. 5. Nailor Industries Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

1. Door:


a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure

class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with

outside and inside handles. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with

outside and inside handles.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or

failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and

stop.

2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS



1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

D. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.


G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, and equipment. 3. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 4. Upstream of turning vanes. 5. Elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 12 inches.

J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

M. Connect diffusers to low-pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

P. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 64 23.21 - 1 Air-Cooled, Scroll Water Chillers

SECTION 23 64 23.21 AIR-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

C. DDC: Direct digital control.

D. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in Btu/h to the total power input given in watts at any given set of rating conditions.

E. GFI: Ground fault interrupt.

F. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and referenced to AHRI standard rating conditions.

G. I/O: Input/output.

H. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.

I. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than the AHRI standard rating conditions.

J. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

K. TEAO: Totally enclosed air over.

L. TENV: Totally enclosed nonventilating.



1. Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


2. Performance at AHRI standard conditions and at conditions indicated. 3. Performance at AHRI standard unloading conditions. 4. Minimum evaporator flow rate. 5. Remote evaporator drawing and piping schematic. 6. Recommended refrigerant piping sizes. 7. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller. 8. Oil capacity of water chiller. 9. Fluid capacity of evaporator. 10. Characteristics of safety relief valves. 11. Force and moment capacity of each piping connection.

B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:

1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 5. Diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field Test Reports: Include startup service reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Spare Parts List: Recommended spare parts list with quantity for each.

C. Touchup Paint Description: Detailed description of paint used in application of finish coat to allow for procurement of a matching paint.

D. Instructional Videos: Including those that are pre-recorded and those that are recorded during training.


A. Tool kit to include the following:

1. A tool kit specially designed by chiller manufacturer for use in servicing chiller(s) furnished. 2. Special tools required to service chiller components not readily available to Owner service

personnel in performing routine maintenance. 3. Lockable case with hinged cover, marked with large and permanent text to indicate the special

purpose of tool kit, such as "Chiller Tool Kit." Text size shall be at least 1 inch (25 mm) high. 4. A list of each tool furnished. Permanently attach the list to underside of case cover. Text size shall

be at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

B. Touchup Paint: Container of paint used for finish coat. Label outside of container with detailed description of paint to allow for procurement of a matching paint in the future.



A. AHRI Certification: Certify chiller according to AHRI 590 certification program.


A. Ship water chillers with holding charge of refrigerant and oil.

B. Package water chiller for export shipping.

C. Chillers shall be plastic wrapped weather tight for shipping.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge. b. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge. c. Refrigerant and oil charge.

1) Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason due to manufacturer's product defect and product installation.

d. Parts only.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AHRI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in AHRI 550/590.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with requirements of UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment," and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance.

G. Operation Following Loss of Normal Power:

1. Equipment, associated factory- and field-installed controls, and associated electrical equipment and power supply connected to backup power system shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to the operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power


without need for manual intervention by an operator when power is restored either through a backup power source, or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought on-line.

2. See drawings for equipment served by backup power systems. 3. Provide means and methods required to satisfy requirement even if not explicitly indicated.

H. Outdoor Installations:

1. Chiller shall be suitable for outdoor installation indicated. Provide adequate weather protection to ensure reliable service life over a 30-year period with minimal degradation due to exposure to outdoor ambient conditions.

2. Chillers equipped to provide safe and stable operation while achieving performance indicated when operating at extreme outdoor temperatures encountered by the installation. Review historical weather database and provide equipment that can operate at extreme outdoor temperatures recorded over past 30-year period.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Carrier. 2. Daikin Applied. 3. Trane. 4. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with compressor(s), compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, condenser with fans, electrical power, controls, and indicated accessories.

B. Fabricate water chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist water chiller movement during a seismic event when water chiller is anchored to field support pad.

C. Sound-reduction package shall have the following:

1. Acoustic enclosure around compressors. 2. Reduced-speed fans with acoustic treatment. 3. Designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance.

2.4 CABINET

A. Base: Galvanized-steel base extending the perimeter of water chiller. Secure frame, compressors, and evaporator to base to provide a single-piece unit.

B. Frame: Rigid galvanized-steel frame secured to base and designed to support cabinet, condenser, control panel, and other chiller components not directly supported from base.

C. Casing: Galvanized steel.

D. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Manufacturer’s standard powder coat paint.

2.5 COMPRESSOR-DRIVE ASSEMBLIES

A. Compressors:






1. Description: Positive-displacement direct drive scrolls with hermetically sealed casing. 2. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil heater, and

suction strainer. 3. Operating Speed: Nominal 3600 rpm for 60-Hz applications. 4. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling.

a. Digital compressor unloading is an acceptable alternative to achieve capacity control.

5. Oil Lubrication System: Automatic pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection, filter with magnetic plug or removable magnet in sump, and initial oil charge.

a. Manufacturer's other standard methods of providing positive lubrication are acceptable in lieu of an automatic pump.

6. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on rubber in shear vibration isolators.

B. Compressor Motors:

1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 2. High-torque, two-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each phase.

C. Compressor Motor Controllers:

1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, non-reversing.

2.6 REFRIGERATION

A. Refrigerant: R-410A. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.

B. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.

C. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include a thermal-expansion valve, refrigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.

D. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor discharge line and the refrigerant liquid-line to allow the isolation and storage of the refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser.

1. For multiple compressor assemblies, it is acceptable to isolate each compressor assembly in each circuit in lieu of each compressor.

E. Pressure Relief Device:

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15, ASHRAE 147, and applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Select and configure pressure relief devices to protect against corrosion and inadvertent release of refrigerant.

3. ASME-rated, spring-loaded, pressure relief valve; single- or multiple-reseating type. Pressure relief valve(s) shall be provided for each heat exchanger.

2.7 REMOTE EVAPORATOR

A. Brazed-plate design.


1. Direct-expansion, single-pass, brazed-plate design for remote mounting outside the chiller cabinet. 2. Type: Stainless-steel construction. 3. Code Compliance: Tested according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 4. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling or threaded end connections for connection to

field piping. 5. Inlet Strainer: Factory-furnished, 20-mesh strainer for field installation in supply piping to

evaporator. Manufacturer has option to factory install strainer.

B. Flow Switch: Factory-furnished flow switch wired to chiller operating controls.

C. Heater: Factory-installed and -wired electric heater with integral controls designed to protect the evaporator to minus 20 deg F.

2.8 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER

A. Coil(s) with integral subcooling on each circuit.

B. Coil construction shall be either of the following:

1. Copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. 2. Microchannel aluminum coils.

C. Corrosion-Resistant Coil Coating: None.

D. Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades, arranged for vertical air discharge.

E. Fan Motors: TENV or TEAO enclosure, with sealed and permanently lubricated bearings, and having built-in overcurrent- and thermal-overload protection.

1. Overcurrent- and thermal-overload protection not integral to motor is acceptable if provided with chiller electrical power package.

F. Fan Guards: Removable steel wire mesh safety guards with corrosion-resistant coating.

2.9 INSULATION

A. Closed-cell, flexible, elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.

1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface. 2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for

other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces. 3. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier. 4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts. 5. Manufacturer has option to factory or field insulate chiller components to reduce potential for

damage during installation. 6. Field-Applied Insulation:


a. Components that are not factory insulated shall be field insulated to comply with requirements indicated.

b. Manufacturer shall be responsible for chiller insulation whether factory or field installed to ensure that manufacturer is the single point of responsibility for chillers.

c. Manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative shall instruct and supervise installation of field-applied insulation.

d. After field-applied insulation is complete, paint insulation to match factory-applied finish.

2.10 ELECTRICAL

A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

B. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to water chiller.

C. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure with hinged access door with lock and key or padlock and key.

D. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.

E. Factory wiring shall be located outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway. Terminal connections shall be made with not more than a 24-inch (610-mm) length of liquidtight or flexible metallic conduit.

F. Field power interface shall be to NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect switch. Minimum SCCR according to UL 508 shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 42,000 A.

G. Each motor shall have branch power circuit and controls with one of the following disconnecting means having SCCR to match main disconnecting means:

1. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.

2. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch. 3. UL 489, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-circuit trip

coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

H. Each motor shall have overcurrent protection.

I. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995, or an integral component of water chiller control microprocessor.

J. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings.

K. Power Factor Correction: Capacitors to correct power factor to 0.95 at full load.

L. Controls Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity.

M. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays, or an integral to water chiller microprocessor.

N. Service Receptacle:

1. Unit-mounted, 120-V GFI duplex receptacle. 2. Power receptacle from chiller internal electrical power wiring.

O. Indicate the following for water chiller electrical power supply:

1. Current, phase to phase, for all three phases.


2. Voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral for all three phases. 3. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). 4. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). 5. Power factor. 6. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt hours). 7. Fault log, with time and date of each.

2.11 CONTROLS

A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

B. Standalone, microprocessor based, with all memory stored in nonvolatile memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power.

C. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate enclosure of matching construction.

D. Operator Interface: Keypad or pressure-sensitive touch screen. Multiple-character, digital display. Display the following:

1. Date and time. 2. Operating or alarm status. 3. Operating hours. 4. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset. 5. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. 6. Chilled-water entering and leaving temperatures. 7. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. 8. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. 9. No cooling load condition. 10. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). 11. Pump status. 12. Antirecycling timer status. 13. Percent of maximum motor amperage. 14. Current-limit set point. 15. Number of compressor starts. 16. Alarm history with retention of operational data before unit shutdown. 17. Superheat.

E. Control Functions:

1. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. 2. Capacity control based on evaporator leaving-fluid temperature. 3. Capacity control compensated by rate of change of evaporator entering-fluid temperature. 4. Chilled-water entering and leaving temperatures, control set points, and motor load limit. Chilled-

water leaving temperature shall be reset based on outside-air temperature. 5. Current limit and demand limit. 6. External water chiller emergency stop. 7. Antirecycling timer. 8. Automatic lead-lag switching.

F. Manual-Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water chiller and require manual reset:

1. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure. 2. Low chilled-water temperature. 3. Refrigerant high pressure. 4. High or low oil pressure. 5. High oil temperature.


6. Loss of chilled-water flow. 7. Loss of condenser-water flow. 8. Control device failure.

G. DDC System Interface: Factory-install hardware and software to enable system to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms. Coordinate require communication protocol with controls vendor.

1. Hardwired I/O Points:

a. Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm. b. Control: On/off operation, chilled-water discharge temperature set-point adjustment.

2. Communication Interface: Industry-accepted open-protocol communication interface shall enable control system operator to remotely control and monitor the water chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at water chiller control panel shall be available through DDC system for HVAC.

H. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in NFPA 70-complaint raceway.

2.12 ACCESSORIES

A. Factory-furnished restrained spring isolators for field installation.

1. Spring Deflection: 2 inch.

B. Compressor blankets to reduce transmitted noise.

C. Protective, coated wire guards on entire unit.

2.13 PERFORMANCE

A. As scheduled on the drawings.

2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test water chillers, before shipping, according to AHRI 550/590.

1. Test the following conditions:

a. Design conditions indicated. b. AHRI 550/590 part-load points.

C. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.

D. For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to AHRI 370 procedure.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, controls, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping, controls, and electrical connections.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments to concrete pad with actual equipment provided.

B. Install water chillers on existing concrete pad.

C. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Maintain clearances required by governing code.

F. Chiller manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel shall charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory installed.

G. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

1. Chillers shipped in multiple major assemblies shall be field assembled by chiller manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 21 13 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 23 21 16 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 23 23 00 "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Where installing piping adjacent to chillers, allow space for service and maintenance.

D. Evaporator Fluid Connections:

1. Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage.

2. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve.

3. Make connections to water chiller with a union or mechanical coupling.

E. Connect each drain connection with a drain valve, full size of drain connection.


F. Connect each chiller vent connection with an automatic vent, full size of vent connection.

3.4 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Provide nameplate for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Locate nameplate where easily visible.

3.5 CONTROLS CONNECTIONS

A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring between chillers and other equipment to interlock operation as required to provide a complete and functioning system.

C. Connect control wiring between chiller control interface and DDC system for remote monitoring and control of chillers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

D. Provide nameplate on face of chiller control panel indicating control equipment designation serving chiller and the I/O point designation for each control connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested. 2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 4. Operate water chiller for run-in period. 5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device for chillers installed indoors is vented outside. 7. Verify proper motor rotation. 8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller startup and

shutdown. 9. Verify and record performance of chilled-water flow and low-temperature interlocks. 10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices. 11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Visually inspect chiller for damage before starting. Repair or replace damaged components, including insulation. Do not start chiller until damage that is detrimental to operation has been corrected.

E. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.


3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers. Video record the training sessions and provide electronic copy to Owner.

1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified. 2. Train personnel in operation and maintenance and to obtain maximum efficiency in plant

operation. 3. Provide instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are coordinated with

operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Obtain Owner sign-off that training is complete. 5. Owner training shall be held at Project site.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 23 73 13 - 1 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units

SECTION 23 73 13 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Indoor air-handling units.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Unit dimensions and weight. 2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 3. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan-sound power ratings. c. Fan construction and accessories. d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Filters with performance characteristics.


A. Warranty.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Start-up service reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.

C. AHRI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to AHRI 430, "Performance Rating of Central-Station Air-Handling Unit Supply Fans," and shall be listed and labeled by AHRI.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of air-handling units that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Per UM Standards any available factory extended warranties shall be purchased with each unit. 2. Complete Air-Handling Unit: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion for entire air-handling

unit and longer where indicated for individual components.

C. As part of the Contract Warranty, the manufacturer shall provide a representative for a service call monthly to confirm proper operation of the unit(s). The service calls shall be for the one-year warranty period and commence one month after substantial completion.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, with actual equipment provided.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings.

2.2 CAPACITY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. As scheduled on the drawings.

2.3 AIR HANDLING UNIT MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier. 2. Daikin Applied. 3. Trane. 4. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.4 UNIT CASINGS

A. Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Construction: High pressure, low leakage 2” double wall construction. 2. Outer Panel: 24 ga, G90 galvanized steel, unpainted. 3. Inner panel/liner: 24 ga galvanized steel. 4. Deflection Performance:

a. Floor: 1/360 of the span. b. Walls/Roof: 1/200 at operating conditions.

5. Leakage: 1% of design CFM at 1.25 times the design total static pressure.

B. Casing Insulation:

1. Materials: 2” thick, R-12 injected foam. 2. Location and Application: Factory applied at all sections. 3. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing. 4. Include thermal break between inner and outer skin.

C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal

components.

3. Access Doors:






a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Fabricate windows in fan section doors of double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety glass with

an air space between panes and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals. d. Size: At least 16 inches wide by full height of unit casing.

4. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Sections: Doors. b. Access Sections: Doors. c. Coil Sections: Inspection and access panel. d. Damper Section: Doors. e. Filter Sections: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters.

5. Service Lights: LED vaporproof fixture with switched junction box located outside adjacent to door.

a. Locations: Each section accessed with door.

D. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils heat recovery coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

2. Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet. 3. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with

threaded nipple on both ends of pan. 4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil.

Intermediate pan shall drain through the casing, rather than to lower pan.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Continuous formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.

2.5 FAN AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating oil.

b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

B. Plenum Fan Housings: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute housing.

C. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.


D. Fan Shaft Bearings:

1. Grease-Lubricated, Tapered-Roller Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing with copper grease lines extended to outside unit and a rated life of 120,000 hours according to ABMA 11.

E. Internal Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's standard vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 2 inch.

F. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. 3. Motor Sizes: As scheduled. 4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and

connections specified in electrical Sections.

2.6 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION

A. General: Factory installed airflow monitoring station at all fan inlets.

B. Certifications: Unit shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal – Airflow Measuring Station Performance.

C. Provide airflow measuring stations on all fans in all air handling units.

D. Provide air flow measuring station at the outside air inlet to the unit.

2.7 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A. 2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting

value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both

sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Airguard. 2. American Air Filter. 3. Camfil Farr.

C. Type and MERV Rating: As scheduled on the drawings.

D. Filter Gages:

1. 3-1/2-inch diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case. 2. Vent valves. 3. Black figures on white background. 4. Front recalibration adjustment. 5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy. 6. Range: 0- to 3.0-inch wg.


7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch aluminum tubing, and vent valves.

2.8 DAMPERS

A. Isolation Dampers: Provided exterior to unit.

B. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC"

C. Outdoor-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, aluminum dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade arrangement with cadmium-plated steel operating rods rotating in stainless-steel sleeve bearings mounted in a single aluminum frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

2.9 COIL SECTIONS

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with AHRI 410. 2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to allow in-

place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

B. Chilled Water Cooling Coils:

1. Performance: As scheduled on the drawings. 2. Piping Connections: Threaded, same end of coil. 3. Tube Material: Copper. 4. Fin Material: Aluminum. 5. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond. 6. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated. 7. Frames: Galvanized steel channel. 8. Coil Working-Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F. 9. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig and to 200 psig underwater.

C. Internal Face-and-Bypass Steam Preheat Coils:

1. Coil Type: Steam distributed. 2. Piping Connections: Threaded or flanged, same end of coil. 3. Tube Material: Copper, minimum 0.049” thick wall tubing. 4. Fin Material: Aluminum, minimum 0.0095” thick. 5. Fin and Tube Joint: Silver brazed. 6. Headers: Extra heavy copper tube with intruded tube holes and brazed joints. 7. Casing: Channel frame, 14-gauge galvanized steel. 8. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410. 9. Coil Working-Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F. 10. Coating: Casing and Dampers, Powder-baked enamel. 11. Internal Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Horizontal opposed-blade, 16-gauge galvanized-steel

dampers with cadmium-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Meeting edges of blades shall have gaskets and edge seals, and blades shall be mechanically fastened. Linkage between face damper blades and bypass damper blades shall operate each group inversely.



A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment curbs. 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48.13

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.

D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of all filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.


D. Connect condensate drain pans using ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 21 13 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 23 21 16 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

F. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping." Install shutoff valve at steam supply connections, float and thermostatic trap, and union or flange at each coil return connection. Install gate valve and inlet strainer at supply connection of dry steam humidifiers, and inverted bucket steam trap to condensate return connection.

G. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."

H. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, grounding, switches, and motor controls.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and connections for leaks. 2. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized field service technician to perform startup service to ensure the units are properly installed and set-up and operating to design and factory specifications.

1. Provide on-site control system check out to include proper operation of all control system devices.

All thermostats, dampers, freezestat, etc, and the operation of all modes of each AHU shall be proven correct to the satisfaction of the Designer and Owner. The control system shall not be accepted as complete until this has been done. This is the Contractor’s responsibility and shall be part of the base bid price.

2. If the factory-authorized field service technician finds any problems with the installation, the Contractor shall take any required corrective measures immediately and be responsible for any subsequent start-up expenses.


B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping,

ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. 5. Verify that bearings and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-recommended lubricants. 6. Verify that outdoor- dampers open and close. 7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 8. Install new, clean filters. 9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected duct

systems are in fully open position. 10. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to

indicated rpm. 11. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 12. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage factory-authorized service technicians to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.

1. Minimum of 2 hours of training by the factory-authorized service technician training shall be be

provided during start-up procedures for the UM HVAC technicians with Designer present.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 05 19 - 1 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire. 2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC. 3. Fire-alarm wire and cable. 4. Connectors and splices.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. 3. Service Wire Co. 4. Southwire Company.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83. 3. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath.








1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. 3. Service Wire Co. 4. Southwire Company.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and

Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Circuits:

1. Single circuit. 2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.

E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.

F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

G. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

H. Armor: Steel, interlocked.

I. Jacket: PVC applied over armor.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Allied Wire & Cable Inc. 2. CommScope, Inc. 3. Radix Wire. 4. Superior Essex Inc.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire-alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a two-hour rating.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600 V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a two-hour rating.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, in pathway.












2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, in pathway.

2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.


1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. ABB, Electrification Business. 3. Gardner Bender. 4. Hubbell Utility Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.

C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.

D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper. 2. Type: One hole with standard barrels. 3. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders:

1. Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: 1. Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.

C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. Type MC where allowed by Code.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.







C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Comply with NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal pathway according to Section 27 05 28.29 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems."

1. Install plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire-alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system must be

installed in a dedicated pathway system.

a. Cables and pathways used for fire-alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

3. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of two-hour, fire-rated fire-alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted.

4. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire-alarm cables may be installed in the same cable or pathway as signaling line circuits.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire-alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire-alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

F. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire-alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.


C. Wiring at outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.7 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.8 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

1. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey.

c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a

potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

A. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance

with requirements.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 05 26 - 1 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB, Electrification Business. 2. ERICO; nVent. 3. ILSCO.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3.






2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Mechanical-Type Bus-Bar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 30 inch below grade.

C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe.

D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with more than one continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Receptacle circuits. 3. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 4. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Flexible raceway runs. 6. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values for systems with capacity of 500 kVA and less: 10 ohms

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 05 29 - 1 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduit and cable support devices. 2. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including mechanical expansion anchors,

clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

B. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element.

3. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325.

4. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101

B. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners

on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. To Steel: Spring-tension clamps. 5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.


3.3 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 05 33 - 1 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Boxes.


1. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at conduit and box entrances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Metal Conduit:

1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

B. Metal Fittings:

1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and application. 3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 4. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Compression.

2.2 BOXES

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.


C. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

D. Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.

G. Gangable boxes are allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 2. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in

kitchens and damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. EMT: Use compression steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

D. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter.

C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.

H. Conceal conduit within finished walls and ceilings unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

I. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.


J. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an

enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

S. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

T. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

U. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

V. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

W. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."


3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 05 44 - 1 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling

SECTION 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,

with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches thickness shall be 0.052 inch.


b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches thickness shall be 0.138 inch

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to

secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:


a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable

unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install

sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 05 53 - 1 Identification for Electrical Systems

SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Tags. 4. Cable ties. 5. Fasteners for labels and signs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ASME A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 26 05 73.19 "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

B. Color-Coding for Phase- Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.


b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow.

4. Color for Neutral: White. 5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.

C. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Black letters on a white field.

2.3 LABELS

A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.

2.4 BANDS

A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.

2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.6 TAGS

A. Write-on Tags:

1. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment. 2. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.7 SIGNS

A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend. 2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for

mounting. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.


2.8 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items.

G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

I. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

J. Vinyl Wraparound Labels:


1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the

location and substrate.

K. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

L. Write-on Tags:

1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using general-purpose cable ties.

M. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

N. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Feeder and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, use snap-around color-coding bands to identify the phase.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

F. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.

G. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Indoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer.

b. Junction boxes concealed above accessible ceilings.

H. Labels shall be installed in easy to see and reach locations for ease of future maintenance.


1. On equipment that is exposed in occupied space do not place labels on face of units, if possible place labels on the above ceiling portion of equipment, or discreetly on the sides of exposed units.

I. Equipment which does not lend itself to easy installation of label (ie. pumps), shall be provided with a flat stainless steel plate (minimum 20 ga) sized large enough for label, with tab(s) and bolted or otherwise permanently attached to equipment.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 27 26 - 1 Wiring Devices

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 3. Cord and plug sets. 4. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 5. Wall plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


1.7 WARRANTY FOR DEVICES

A. Special Manufacturer Extended Warranty: Manufacturer warrants that devices perform in accordance with specified requirements and agrees to provide repair or replacement of devices that fail to perform as specified within extended warranty period.

1. Extended Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion; full coverage for labor, materials, and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.


C. RoHS compliant.

D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.

E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section.

F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:

1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

G. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Essential Electrical System: Red.

H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, as selected by Architect.

I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.

B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.


2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet

Locations" Article.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A :

1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding.

2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Non-feed through. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

B. Tamper- and Weather-Resistant, GFCI Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.

2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R. 3. Type: Non-feed through. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and UL 943 Class A. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" and

"Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" articles.

2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A

A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

B. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

C. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Description: For use with mechanically held lighting contactors. 2. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.


B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover and listed and labeled

for use in wet and damp locations.

C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, thermoplastic with lockable cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor

tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.


9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated

digital-display indicators of measurement.

D. Tests for Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker,

poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

E. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


F. Prepare test and inspection reports.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 28 13 - 1 Fuses

SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in enclosed switches.


1. Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data”


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

2. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

1. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Feeders: Class J, time delay. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2150&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456803154&mf=04&src=wd





3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet as indicated in the field by Owner.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 28 16 - 1 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Enclosures.


1. Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. Model HG61234






2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. Model HN623

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Models HA161234 and HA261234

4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. Model HG61234 with ground kit.

5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 6. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac.

D. Accessories:

1. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and closed. 2. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped. 3. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 24-V dc coil voltage.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.





B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 29 13 - 1 Enclosed Controllers

SECTION 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic.


1. Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data” 2. Section 01 79 00 “Demonstration and Training.”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.






A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.

1. Configuration: Nonreversing. 2. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

3. Surface mounting.

C. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.

1. Configuration: Nonreversing. 2. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.


3. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

4. Control Circuits: 24-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

5. Bimetallic Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and

with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting.

6. N.C., isolated overload alarm contact. 7. External overload reset push button.

D. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.

1. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class R fuses.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

2. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty type.

a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; unwired.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

C. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 13 "Fuses."

D. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

E. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

F. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.




B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.




1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate

rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance

Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest.


D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Architect before increasing settings.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.


UM DP Corbett HVAC Renovation 26 29 23 - 1 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers

SECTION 26 29 23 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. DDC: Direct digital control.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. LED: Light-emitting diode.

E. NC: Normally closed.

F. NO: Normally open.

G. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

H. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

I. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

J. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.


A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated.

1. Include dimensions and finishes for VFCs. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated.

1. Include mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and motor-circuit protector trip settings.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 Insert number percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB, Electrification Business. 2. Danfoss Inc. 3. Eaton. 4. Schneider Electric USA, Inc. 5. Siemens Industry, Inc., Building Technologies Division.









A. General Requirements for VFCs:

1. VFCs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508A.

B. Application: Constant torque and variable torque as required.

C. VFC Description: Variable-frequency motor controller, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors, as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."

2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

E. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

F. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed

condition. 6. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 7. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 8. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 9. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2.

G. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

H. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

I. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFC, complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2.


2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFC and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection

system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor-overtemperature fault.

J. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.

K. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.

L. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.

M. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

N. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

O. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: UL 489, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating. 2. Auxiliary Contacts: NO or NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open.


A. Seismic Performance: VFCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. The designated VFCs shall be tested and certified by an NRTL as meeting the ICC-ES AC 156 test procedure requirements.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified.”

2.4 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.


B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital display and additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: Operator-selectable "x"- to "y"-mA dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the DDC system for HVAC or other control systems:

a. 0- to 10-V dc. b. 4- to 20-mA dc. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) operator-selectable "x"- to "y"-mA dc, which can be configured for any of the following:

a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz).


4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.

1. Number of Loops: One.

G. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface with DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. VFC settings shall be retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On-off status. b. Control: On-off operation.

2. Communication Interface: Comply with ASHRAE 135. Communication shall interface with DDC system for HVAC to remotely control and monitor lighting from a DDC system for HVAC operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at lighting panel shall be available through the DDC system for HVAC.

H. Bypass Mode: Manual operation only; requires local operator selection at VFC. Transfer between power converter and bypass contactor, and retransfer shall only be allowed with the motor at zero speed.

I. Bypass Mode: Field-selectable automatic or manual, allows local and remote transfer between power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer, either via manual operator interface or automatic-control system feedback.

J. Bypass Controller: Two-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as "Plenum Rated."


A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features

specified.

B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 13 "Fuses."

E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors are installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.


3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If

outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed Drives stated

in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFC. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VFC 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.


F. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.

E. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.


Date post:	18-Nov-2021
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times